69NT40-511-001 To 199

Container Refrigeration
OPERATION AND SERVICE

for
69NT40--551--001 TO 199
Container Refrigeration Units
T-- 320 Rev A

OPERATION AND SERVICE MANUAL
CONTAINER REFRIGERATION UNIT
Models
69NT40--551--001 to 199
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PARAGRAPH NUMBER Page

GENERAL SAFETY NOTICES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Safety-1
FIRST AID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Safety-1
OPERATING PRECAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Safety-1
MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Safety-1
UNIT LABEL IDENTIFICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Safety-1
SPECIFIC WARNING AND CAUTION STATEMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Safety-1
INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
1.1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
1.2 CONFIGURATION IDENTIFICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
1.3 OPTION DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
1.3.1 Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
1.3.2 Dehumidification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
1.3.3 Control Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
1.3.4 Temperature Readout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
1.3.5 Pressure Readout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
1.3.6 USDA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
1.3.7 Interrogator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
1.3.8 Remote Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
1.3.9 Communications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
1.3.10 Compressor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
1.3.11 Condenser Coil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
1.3.12 Autotransformer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
1.3.13 Temperature Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
1.3.14 Gutters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
1.3.15 Handles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
1.3.16 Thermometer Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
1.3.17 Water Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
1.3.18 Back Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
1.3.19 460 Volt Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
1.3.20 230 Volt Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
1.3.21 Cable Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
1.3.22 Upper Air (Fresh Air Make Up) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
1.3.23 Lower Air (Fresh Air Make Up) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
1.3.24 Power Correction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
1.3.25 Evaporator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
1.3.26 Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
1.3.27 Plate Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
1.3.28 Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
1.3.29 Condenser Grille . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
i T-320
TABLE OF CONTENTS - Continued

DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
2.1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
2.1.1 Refrigeration Unit -- Front Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
2.1.2 Fresh Air Makeup Vent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
2.1.3 Evaporator Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
2.1.4 Compressor Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
2.1.5 Air Cooled Condenser Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
2.1.6 Water-Cooled Condenser Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
2.1.7 Control Box Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
2.1.8 Communications Interface Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
2.2 REFRIGERATION SYSTEM DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
2.3 ELECTRICAL DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
2.4 SAFETY AND PROTECTIVE DEVICES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
2.5 REFRIGERATION CIRCUIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
2.5.1 Standard Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
2.5.2 Economized Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
2.5.3 Unloaded Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
MICROPROCESSOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
3.1 TEMPERATURE CONTROL MICROPROCESSOR SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
3.1.1 Key Pad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
3.1.2 Display Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
3.1.3 Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
3.2 CONTROLLER SOFTWARE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
3.2.1 Configuration Software
(Configuration Variables) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
3.2.2 Operational Software (Function codes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
3.3 MODES OF OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
3.3.1 Temperature Control -- Perishable Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
3.3.2 Defrost Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
3.3.3 Failure Action . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
3.3.4 Generator Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
3.3.5 Compressor High Temperature, Low Pressure Protection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
3.3.6 Perishable Mode -- Conventional . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
3.3.7 Perishable Mode -- Economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
3.3.8 Perishable Mode -- Dehumidification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
3.3.9 Perishable, Dehumidification -- Bulb Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
3.3.10 Temperature Control -- Frozen Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
3.3.11 Frozen Mode -- Conventional . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
3.3.12 Frozen Mode -- Economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
3.4 CONTROLLER ALARMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
3.5. UNIT PRE-TRIP DIAGNOSTICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
T-320 ii

3.6 DataCORDER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
3.6.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
3.6.2 DataCORDER Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
3.6.3 Sensor Configuration (dCF02) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
3.6.4 Logging Interval (dCF03) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
3.6.5 Thermistor Format (dCF04) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
3.6.6 Sampling Type (dCF05 & dCF06) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
3.6.7 Alarm Configuration (dCF07 -- dCF10) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
3.6.8 DataCORDER Power-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
3.6.9 Pre-Trip Data Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
3.6.10 DataCORDER Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
3.6.11 USDA Cold Treatment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
3.6.12 USDA Cold Treatment Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
3.6.13 DataCORDER Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
3.6.14 ISO Trip Header . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
4.1 INSPECTION (Before Starting) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
4.2 CONNECT POWER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
4.2.1 Connection To 380/460 vac Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
4.2.2 Connection to190/230 vac Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
4.3 ADJUST FRESH AIR MAKEUP VENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
4.3.1 Upper Fresh Air Makeup Vent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
4.3.2 Lower Fresh Air Makeup Vent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
4.3.3 Fresh Air Position Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
4.4 CONNECT WATER-COOLED CONDENSER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
4.4.1 Water--Cooled Condenser with Water Pressure Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
4.4.2 Water-Cooled Condenser with Condenser Fan Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
4.5 CONNECT REMOTE MONITORING RECEPTACLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
4.6 STARTING AND STOPPING INSTRUCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
4.6.1 Starting the Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
4.6.2 Stopping the Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
4.7 START--UP INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
4.7.1 Physical Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
4.7.2 Check Controller Function Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
4.7.3 Start Temperature Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
4.7.4 Complete Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
4.8 PRE-TRIP DIAGNOSIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
4.9 OBSERVE UNIT OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
4.9.1 Probe Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
iii T-320

4.10 SEQUENCE OF OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
4.10.1 Sequence Of operation -- Compressor Phase Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
4.10.2 Sequence Of Operation -- Perishable Mode Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
4.10.3 Sequence Of Operation -- Perishable Mode Heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
4.10.4 Sequence Of operation -- Frozen Mode Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
4.10.5 Sequence Of Operation -- Defrost . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
4.11 EMERGENCY OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
4.11.1 Emergency Bypass Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
4.11.2 Emergency Defrost Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
TROUBLESHOOTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
5.1 UNIT WILL NOT START OR STARTS THEN STOPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
5.2 UNIT OPERATES LONG OR CONTINUOUSLY IN COOLING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
5.3 UNIT RUNS BUT HAS INSUFFICIENT COOLING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
5.4 UNIT WILL NOT HEAT OR HAS INSUFFICIENT HEATING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
5.5 UNIT WILL NOT TERMINATE HEATING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
5.6 UNIT WILL NOT DEFROST PROPERLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
5.7 ABNORMAL PRESSURES (COOLING) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
5.8 ABNORMAL NOISE OR VIBRATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
5.9 CONTROLLER MALFUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
5.10 NO EVAPORATOR AIR FLOW OR RESTRICTED AIR FLOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
5.11 THERMOSTATIC EXPANSION VALVE MALFUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
5.12 AUTOTRANSFORMER MALFUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
5.13 WATER-COOLED CONDENSER OR WATER PRESSURE SWITCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
5.14 COMPRESSOR OPERATING IN REVERSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
5.15 ABNORMAL TEMPERATURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
5.16 ABNORMAL CURRENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
6.1 SECTION LAYOUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
6.2 MANIFOLD GAUGE SET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
6.3 REFRIGERATION SYSTEM SERVICE-- UNITS WITH STANDARD PIPING (with Service Valves) 6-2
6.3.1 Service Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
6.3.2 Pumping Down the Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
6.3.3 Refrigerant Leak Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
6.3.4 Evacuation and Dehydration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
6.3.5 Refrigerant Charge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
6.4.1 Service Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
6.4.2 Refrigerant Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
6.4.3 Refrigerant Leak Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
6.4.4 Evacuation and Dehydration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
6.4.5 Refrigerant Charge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
6.4.7 Adding Refrigerant to System (Partial Charge) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
6.5 COMPRESSOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
6.5.1 Removal and Replacement of Compressor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
6.6 COMPRESSOR OIL LEVEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
T-320 iv

6.7 HIGH PRESSURE SWITCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
6.7.1 Replacing High Pressure Switch -- Units with Standard Piping (with Service Valves) . . . . . . . . 6-10
6.7.2 Replacing High Pressure Switch -- Units with Semi--Hermetic Piping (without Service Valves) 6-10
6.7.3 Checking High Pressure Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
6.8 CONDENSER COIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
6.9 CONDENSER FAN AND MOTOR ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
6.10 WATER COOLED CONDENSER CLEANING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
6.11 FILTER-DRIER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
6.12 EXPANSION VALVES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
6.12.1 Checking Superheat. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
6.12.2 Valve Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
6.13 EVAPORATOR COIL AND HEATER ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
6.13.1 Evaporator Coil Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
6.13.2 Evaporator Heater Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
6.14 ECONOMIZER, UNLOADER AND OIl RETURN SOLENOID VALVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
6.15 EVAPORATOR FAN AND MOTOR ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
6.15.1 Replacing The Evaporator Fan Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16
6.15.2 Disassemble The Evaporator Fan Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16
6.15.3 Assemble The Evaporator Fan Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16
6.16 EVAPORATOR FAN MOTOR CAPACITORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16
6.16.1 When To Check For A Defective Capacitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16
6.16.2 Removing The Capacitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17
6.16.3 Checking The Capacitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17
6.17 VALVE OVERRIDE CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17
6.18 SUCTION MODULATION VALVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18
6.18.1 Precheck Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18
6.18.2 Checking The Stepper valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18
6.19 AUTOTRANSFORMER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18
6.20 CONTROLLER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19
6.20.1 Handling Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19
6.20.2 Controller Trouble-Shooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19
6.20.3 Controller Programming Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19
6.20.4 Removing and Installing a Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20
6.21 VENT POSITION SENSOR SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20
6.22 TEMPERATURE SENSOR SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21
6.22.1 Sensor Checkout Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21
6.22.2 Sensor Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21
6.22.3 Sensor Re--Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22
6.23 ELECTRONIC PARTLOW TEMPERATURE RECORDER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23
6.24 MAINTENANCE OF PAINTED SURFACES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24
v T-320

6.25 COMPOSITE CONTROL BOX REPAIRS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24
6.25.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24
6.25.2 Cracks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24
6.25.3 Chips And Holes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-25
6.25.4 Inserts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-25
6.25.5 Door Hinge Inserts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-25
6.26 COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE MODULE INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28
ELECTRICAL WIRING SCHEMATIC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
7.1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS
FIGURE NUMBER Page
Figure 2-1 Refrigeration Unit -- Front Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
Figure 2-2 Evaporator Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Figure 2-3 Compressor Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Figure 2-4 Condenser Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Figure 2-5 Water-Cooled Condenser Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Figure 2-6 Control Box Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Figure 2-7 Refrigeration Circuit Schematic -- Standard Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
Figure 2-8 Refrigeration Circuit Schematic -- Economized Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
Figure 2-9 Refrigeration Circuit Schematic -- Unloaded Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
Figure 3- 1 Temperature Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
Figure 3- 2 Key Pad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Figure 3- 3 Display Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Figure 3- 4 Control Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Figure 3- 5 Standard Configuration Download Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
Figure 3- 6 Data Reader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Figure 4-1 Autotransformer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Figure 4-2 Make Up Air Flow Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Figure 4-3 Controller Operation -- Perishable Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
Figure 4-4 Controller Operation -- Frozen Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
Figure 4-5 Perishable Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
Figure 4-6 Perishable Mode Heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
Figure 4-7 Frozen Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
Figure 4-8 Defrost . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
Figure 6-1 Manifold Gauge Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Figure 6-2 R-134a Manifold Gauge/Hose Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Figure 6-3 Service Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Figure 6-4. Refrigeration System Service Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Figure 6-5. Standard Piping Compressor Service Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Figure 6-6. Semi--Hermetic Piping Refrigeration System Service Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Figure 6-7 Compressor Upper Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
Figure 6-8 Compressor Lower Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
Figure 6-9 High Pressure Switch Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
Figure 6-10 Water-Cooled Condenser Cleaning -- Forced Circulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
T-320 vi
LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS - Continued
FIGURE NUMBER Page
Figure 6-11 Water Cooled Condenser Cleaning - Gravity Circulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
Figure 6-12 Thermostatic Expansion Valve Bulb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
Figure 6-13 Hermetic Thermostatic Expansion Valve Brazing Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
Figure 6-14 Evaporator Expansion Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
Figure 6-15 Quench & Economizer Expansion Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
Figure 6-16. Unloader Solenoid Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
Figure 6-17. Oil Return Solenoid Valve (ORV) and Economizer Solenoid Valve (ESV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
Figure 6-18. Evaporator Fan Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16
Figure 6-19 Suction Modulation Valve (SMV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18
Figure 6-20 Controller Section of the Control Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19
Figure 6-21 Sensor Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22
Figure 6-22 Sensor and Cable Splice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22
Figure 6-23 Supply Sensor Positioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22
Figure 6-24 Return Sensor Positioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22
Figure 6-25. Electronic Partlow Temperature Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24
Figure 6-26 Door Hinge Repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-25
Figure 6-27. Insert Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-27
Figure 6-28. Communications Interface Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28
Figure 7-1 LEGEND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
Figure 7-2 SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Figure 7-3 SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM -- TransFRESH and Emergency Bypass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Figure 7-4 WIRING DIAGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
Figure 7-5 SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM, WIRING DIAGRAM-- Electronic Partlow Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
LIST OF TABLES
TABLE NUMBER Page

Table 2-1 Safety and Protective Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Table 3-1 Key Pad Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Table 3-2 DataCORDER Configuration Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Table 3-3 DataCORDER Standard Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Table 3-4 Controller Configuration Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
Table 3-5 Controller Function Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
Table 3-6 Controller Alarm Indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
Table 3-7 Controller Pre-Trip Test Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
Table 3-8 DataCORDER Function Code Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24
Table 3-9 DataCORDER Pre-Trip Result Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25
Table 3-10 DataCORDER Alarm Indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26
Table 6-1 Compressor Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Table 6-2 Sensor Temperature/Resistance Chart (+/--.002%) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21
Table 6-3 Crack, Chip & Hole Repair Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-26
Table 6-4 Insert Repair Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-26
Table 6-5 Drill Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-26
Table 6-6 Recommended Bolt Torque Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28
Table 6-7 R-134a Temperature - Pressure Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-29
vii T-320
SAFETY SUMMARY
GENERAL SAFETY NOTICES harness from the modules unless you are grounded to
the unit frame with a static safe wrist strap.
The following general safety notices supplement the In case of electrical fire, open circuit switch and
specific warnings and cautions appearing elsewhere in
this manual. They are recommended precautions that extinguish with CO2 (never use water).
must be understood and applied during operation and SPECIFIC WARNING AND CAUTION STATE-
maintenance of the equipment covered herein. The MENTS
general safety notices are presented in the following To help identify the label hazards on the unit and explain
three sections labeled: First Aid, Operating Precautions the level of awareness each one carries, an explanation
and Maintenance Precautions. A listing of the specific is given with the appropriate consequences:
warnings and cautions appearing elsewhere in the
manual follows the general safety notices. DANGER -- means an immediate hazard which WILL
result in severe personal injury or death.
FIRST AID WARNING -- means to warn against hazards or unsafe
conditions which COULD result in severe personal
An injury, no matter how slight, should never go injury or death.
unattended. Always obtain first aid or medical attention CAUTION -- means to warn against potential hazard or
immediately. unsafe practice which could result in minor personal
injury, product or property damage.
OPERATING PRECAUTIONS The statements listed below are applicable to the
Always wear safety glasses. refrigeration unit and appear elsewhere in this manual.
These recommended precautions must be understood
Keep hands, clothing and tools clear of the evaporator and applied during operation and maintenance of the
and condenser fans. equipment covered herein.
No work should be performed on the unit until all circuit
breakers, start-stop switches are turned off, and power
supply is disconnected.
DANGER
Always work in pairs. Never work on the equipment Never use air for leak testing. It has been de-
alone. termined that pressurized, mixtures of re-
In case of severe vibration or unusual noise, stop the frigerant and air can undergo combustion
unit and investigate. when exposed to an ignition source.
MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS
Beware of unannounced starting of the evaporator and
WARNING
condenser fans. Do not open the condenser fan grille or Beware of unannounced starting of the
evaporator access panels before turning power off,
disconnecting and securing the power plug. evaporator and condenser fans. The unit
may cycle the fans and compressor unex-
Be sure power is turned off before working on motors, pectedly as control requirements dictate.
controllers, solenoid valves and electrical control
switches. Tag circuit breaker and power supply to
prevent accidental energizing of circuit.
WARNING
Do not bypass any electrical safety devices, e.g.
bridging an overload, or using any sort of jumper wires. Do not attempt to remove power plug(s) be-
Problems with the system should be diagnosed, and fore turning OFF start-stop switch (ST), unit
any necessary repairs performed, by qualified service
personnel. circuit breaker(s) and external power
source.
When performing any arc welding on the unit or
container, disconnect all wire harness connectors from
the modules in both control boxes. Do not remove wire WARNING
Make sure the power plugs are clean and
dry before connecting to any power recep-
tacle.
WARNING
Safety-1 T--320
SAFETY SUMMARY - continued
Make sure that the unit circuit breaker(s)
(CB-1 & CB-2) and the START-STOP switch WARNING
(ST) are in the “O” (OFF) position before
connecting to any electrical power source. With power OFF discharge the capacitor
before disconnecting the circuit wiring.
WARNING WARNING
Do not use a nitrogen cylinder without a
Make sure power to the unit is OFF and pressure regulator. Do not use oxygen in or
power plug disconnected before replacing near a refrigeration system as an explosion
the compressor. may occur.
WARNING
WARNING
Do not open the condenser fan grille before
Before disassembly of the compressor turning power OFF and disconnecting
make sure to relieve the internal pressure power plug.
very carefully by slightly loosening the cou-
plings to break the seal.
WARNING
The Unit Power Plug Must Be Disconnected
To Remove Power From Circuit Breaker Cb1
WARNING
Oakite No. 32 is an acid. Be sure that the
acid is slowly added to the water. DO NOT CAUTION
PUT WATER INTO THE ACID -- this will
cause spattering and excessive heat. Do not remove wire harnesses from con-
troller modules unless you are grounded to
the unit frame with a static safe wrist strap.
WARNING CAUTION
Wear rubber gloves and wash the solution Unplug all controller module wire harness
from the skin immediately if accidental connectors before performing arc welding
contact occurs. Do not allow the solution on any part of the container.
to splash onto con-
crete.
WARNING CAUTION
Do not attempt to use an ML2i PC card in an
ML3 equipped unit. The PC cards are physi-
Always turn OFF the unit circuit breakers cally different and will result in damage to
(CB-1 & CB-2) and disconnect main power the controller.
supply before working on moving parts.
CAUTION
WARNING When condenser water flow is below 11 lpm
(3 gpm) or when water-cooled operation is
Make sure power to the unit is OFF and not in use, the CFS switch MUST be set to
power plug disconnected before removing position ”1” or the unit will not operate
capacitor(s). properly.
T--320
Safety-2
CAUTION CAUTION
Pre-trip inspection should not be per- Take necessary steps (place plywood over
formed with critical temperature cargoes in coil or use sling on motor) to prevent motor
the container. from falling into condenser coil.
CAUTION
CAUTION
When Pre-Trip key is pressed, economy, de-
humidification and bulb mode will be deac- DO NOT disassemble piston from NEW suc-
tivated. At the completion of Pre-Trip activi- tion modulating valve powerhead assem-
ty, economy, dehumidification and bulb bly. Doing so may result in damage to pis-
mode must be reactivated. ton.
CAUTION
CAUTION
When a failure occurs during automatic
testing the unit will suspend operation The unit must be OFF whenever a program-
awaiting operator intervention. ming card is inserted or removed from the
controller programming port.
CAUTION
When Pre--Trip test Auto 2 runs to comple- CAUTION
tion without being interrupted, the unit will
terminate pre-trip and display “Auto 2” Do not allow moisture to enter wire splice
“end.” The unit will suspend operation until area as this may affect the sensor resis-
the user depresses the ENTER key! tance.
CAUTION CAUTION
To prevent trapping liquid refrigerant in the
manifold gauge set be sure set is brought to
suction pressure before disconnecting. Do not allow the recorder stylus to snap
back down. The stylus arm base is spring
loaded, and damage may occur to the chart,
CAUTION or the stylus force may be altered.
The scroll compressor achieves low suc-

tion pressure very quickly. Do not use the
CAUTION
compressor to evacuate the system below
zero psig. Never operate the compressor The inside mechanism of the recorder,
with the suction or discharge service valves particularly the inside of the element
closed (frontseated). Internal damage will housing should never be oiled, however,
result from operating the compressor in a control mechanisms should be sprayed
deep vacuum. periodically (every 60 days) with corrosion
inhibiting CRC 3-36a or 6-66 or LPS no. 2.
CAUTION
CAUTION
Use only Carrier Transicold approved
Polyol Ester Oil (POE) -- Castrol-Icematic
SW20 compressor oil with R-134a. Buy in Recorder element capillary tubing may be
quantities of one quart or smaller. When bent, but never sharper than 1/2” radius;
using this hygroscopic oil, immediately extra care should be taken when bending
reseal. Do not leave container of oil open or adjacent to welds. The bulb should never
contamination will occur. be bent, as this will affect calibration.
Safety-3 T--320
SECTION 1
INTRODUCTION
1.1 INTRODUCTION 1.3.2 Dehumidification
The Carrier Transicold model 69NT40--551--001/199 The unit may be fitted with a humidity sensor. This
series units are of lightweight aluminum frame sensor allows setting of a humidity set point in the
construction, designed to fit in the front of a container controller. In the dehumidification mode the controller
and serve as the container’s front wall. will operate to reduce internal container moisture level.
They are one piece, self-contained, all electric units 1.3.3 Control Box
which includes cooling and heating systems to provide Units are equipped with a composite material box and
precise temperature control. may be fitted with a lockable door.
The units are suppled with a complete charge of 1.3.4 Temperature Readout
refrigerant R-134a and compressor lubricating oil and The unit may be fitted with suction and discharge
are ready for operation upon installation. Forklift temperature sensors. The sensor readings may be
pockets are provided for unit installation and removal. viewed on the controller display.
The base unit operates on nominal 380/460 volt, 3 1.3.5 Pressure Readout
phase, 50/60 hertz power. An optional autotransformer
may be fitted to allow operation on nominal 190/230 , 3 The unit may be fitted with suction and discharge
phase, 50/60 hertz power. Power for the control system pressure gauges or suction and discharge transducers
is provided by a transformer which steps the supply or no pressure readout. The transducer readings may
power down to 18 and 24 volts, single phase. be viewed on the controller display.
The controller is a Carrier Transicold Micro-Link 3 1.3.6 USDA
microprocessor. The controller will operate The unit may be supplied with fittings for additional
automatically to select cooling, holding or heating as temperature probes which allow recording of USDA
required to maintain the desired set point temperature Cold Treatment data by the integral DataCORDER
within very close limits. The unit may also be equipped function of the Micro--Link refrigeration controller.
with an electronic temperature recorder.
1.3.7 Interrogator
The controller has a keypad and display for viewing or
changing operating parameters. The display is also Units that use the DataCORDER function are fitted with
equipped with lights to indicate various modes of interrogator receptacles for connection of equipment to
operation. download the recorded data. Two receptacles may be
fitted, one accessible from the front of the container and
1.2 CONFIGURATION IDENTIFICATION the other mounted inside the container (with the USDA
receptacles).
Unit identification information is provided on a plate 1.3.8 Remote Monitoring
located near the compressor. The plate provides the
unit model number, the unit serial number and the unit The unit may be fitted with a remote monitoring
parts identification number (PID). The model number receptacle. This item allows connection of remote
identifies the overall unit configuration while the PID indicators for COOL, DEFROST and IN RANGE.
provides information on specific optional equipment, Unless otherwise indicated, the receptacle is mounted
factory provision to allow for field installation of optional at the control box location
equipment and differences in detailed parts. 1.3.9 Communications.
Configuration identification for the models covered The unit may be fitted with a communications interface
herein are provided in the Carrier Transicold Container module. The communications interface module is a
Identification Matrix found at the Carrier Web site, slave module which allows communication with a
www.container.carrier.com. master central monitoring station. The module will
respond to communication and return information over
1.3 OPTION DESCRIPTION the main power line. Refer to the ship master system
technical manual for further information.
Various options may be factory or field equipped to the
base unit. These options are listed in the tables and 1.3.10 Compressor
described in the following subparagraphs. The unit is fitted with a scroll compressor with either
1.3.1 Battery standard piping (equipped with suction, discharge,
economizer and oil return service valves) or with
The refrigeration controller may be fitted with standard semi--hermetic piping (equipped with suction, discharge
replaceable batteries or a rechargeable battery pack. and economizer service connections).
1-1 T-320
1.3.11 Condenser Coil 1.3.20 230 Volt Cable
Units equipped with an autotransformer require an
The unit is fitted a 4 row coil using 7mm tubing. additional power cable for connection to the 230 volt
source. Various power cable and plug designs are
1.3.12 Autotransformer available. The plug options tailor the cables to each
customers requirements.
An autotransformer may be provided to allow operation
on 190/230, 3 phase, 50/60 hertz power. The 1.3.21 Cable Restraint
autotransformer raises the supply voltage to the Various designs are available for storage of the power
nominal 380/460 volt power required by the base unit. cables. These options are variations of the compressor
The autotransformer may also be fitted with an section front cover.
individual circuit breaker for the 230 volt power.
1.3.22 Upper Air (Fresh Air Make Up)
If the unit is equipped with an autotransformer and The unit may be fitted with an upper fresh air makeup
communications module, the autotransformer will be assembly. The fresh air makeup assembly is available
fitted with a transformer bridge unit (TBU) to assist in with a Vent Positioning Sensor (VPS) and may also be
communications. fitted with screens.
1.3.23 Lower Air (Fresh Air Make Up)
1.3.13 Temperature Recorder
The unit may be fitted with a lower fresh air makeup
The units may be fitted with an electronic temperature assembly and may also be fitted with screens.
recording device manufactured by the Partlow 1.3.24 Power Correction
Corporation.
The unit may be fitted with a set of power factor
1.3.14 Gutters correction capacitors to assist in correction of
imbalance in current draw by the compressor.
Rain gutters may be fitted over the control box and 1.3.25 Evaporator
recorder section to divert rain away from the controls.
The different gutters include standard length bolted Evaporator section is equipped with a hermetic thermal
gutters, extended length gutters and riveted gutters. expansion valve .
1.3.26 Labels
1.3.15 Handles
Operating Instruction and Function Code listing labels
will differ depending on the options installed. For
The unit may be equipped with handles to facilitate example, additional operating instructions are required
access to stacked containers. These handles may to describe start--up of a unit equipped with an
include fixed handles (located at the sides of the unit) autotransformer. Where the labels are available with
and/or a hinged handle at the center (attached to the additional languages, they are listed in the parts list.
condenser coil cover).
1.3.27 Plate Set
1.3.16 Thermometer Port Each unit is equipped with a tethered set of wiring
schematic and wiring diagram plates. The plate sets are
The unit may be fitted with ports in the front of the frame ordered using a seven digit base part number and a two
for insertion of a thermometer to measure supply and/or digit dash number.
return air temperature. If fitted, the port(s) will require a
cap and chain. 1.3.28 Controller
Two different controllers are available:
1.3.17 Water Cooling 1. Remanufactured -- Controller is the equivalent of a
new OEM controller and is supplied with a 12 month
The refrigeration system may be fitted with a water warranty.
cooled condenser. The condenser is constructed using 2. Repaired -- Controller has had previous faults
copper--nickel tube for sea water applications. The repaired and upgraded with the latest software.
water cooled condenser is in series with the air cooled Note: Repaired controllers are NOT to be used for
condenser and replaces the standard unit receiver. warranty repairs only full OEM Remanufactured
When operating on the water cooled condenser, the controllers are to be used.
condenser fan is deactivated by either a water pressure Controllers will be factory equipped with the latest
switch or condenser fan switch. version of operational software, but will NOT be
configured for a specific model number and will need to
1.3.18 Back Panels be configured, at the time of installation or sale.
1.3.29 Condenser Grille
Back panel designs that may be fitted include panels of
aluminum and stainless steel. Panels may have access Two styles of condenser grilles are available, direct
doors and/or hinge mounting. bolted grilles and hinged grilles.
1.3.30 Emergency Bypass
1.3.19 460 Volt Cable
The unit may be equipped with switches to allow
Various power cable and plug designs are available for emergency bypass of the controller. The EMERGENCY
the main 460 volt supply. The plug options tailor the BYPASS switch functions to bypass the controller in the
cables to each customers requirements. event of controller failure.
T-320 1-2
SECTION 2
DESCRIPTION
2.1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION expansion valve, suction modulation valve and
evaporator coil heaters. The unit model number, serial
2.1.1 Refrigeration Unit -- Front Section number and parts identification number can be found on
the serial plate to the left of the economizer.
The unit is designed so that the majority of the 2.1.2 Fresh Air Makeup Vent
components are accessible from the front, see
Figure 2-1. The upper access panels allow entry into the The function of the upper or lower makeup air vent is to
evaporator section, and the center access panel allows provide ventilation for commodities that require fresh air
access to the evaporator expansion valve, quench circulation.
19
18
17
3
16
15
4
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7 6
5
1. Access Panel (Evap. Fan #1) 10. Power Cables and Plug
2. Access Panel (Heaters, Suction Modulating 11. Condenser Fan
Valve, Quench Expansion Valve & Evaporator 12. Autotransformer
Expansion Valve) 13. TransFRESH Communications Connector
3. Fork Lift Pockets 14. Interrogator Connector (Front left)
4. Control Box 15. Temperature Recorder
5. Compressor 16. Lower Fresh Air Makeup Vent Location
6. Oil Seperator (Blank Cover Shown)
7. Receiver or Water Cooled Condenser 17. TIR (Transports Internationaux Routiers)
8. Economizer Sealing Provisions - Typical All Panels
9. Unit Serial Number, Model Number and 18. Upper Fresh Air Makeup Vent
Parts Identification Number (PID) Plate 19. Access Panel (Evap. Fan #2)
Figure 2-1 Refrigeration Unit -- Front Section
2-1 T-320
2.1.3 Evaporator Section suction temperature sensor.
The evaporator section (Figure 2-2) contains the The evaporator fans circulate air through the container
temperature recorder bulb or return recorder sensor, by pulling it in the top of the unit, directing it through the
return temperature sensor, evaporator expansion valve, evaporator coil, where it is heated or cooled, and
quench expansion valve, suction modulation valve, dual discharging it at the bottom.
speed evaporator fans (EM1 and EM2), evaporator coil The evaporator components are accessible by
and heater, drain pan heater, defrost heaters, defrost removing the upper rear panel (as shown in the
temperature sensor, heat termination thermostat and illustration) or by removing the front access panels.
4
3
6
8
2
1
7
25
24
23 10
22
21
11 12
13 14 15
20
ALTERNATE USDA
19
LOCATION
18 16
17
1. Evaporator Fan Motor #1 14. Low Side Access Valve
2. Return Recorder Sensor/Temperature Sensor 15. Suction Modulating Valve
3. Humidity Sensor 16. Quench Valve Bulb
4. Mechanical Recorder Bulb 17. Suction Temperature Sensor
5. Evaporator Fan Motor #2 18. To Compressor (suction)
6. Defrost Temperature Sensor 19. From Evaporator Coil
7. Heater Termination Thermostat 20. Liquid To Coil
8. Evaporator Coil 21. Interrogator Connector (Rear)
9. Evaporator Coil Heaters 22. USDA Probe Receptacle PR2
10. Drain Pan Heater 23. USDA Probe Receptacle PR1
11. Evaporator Expansion Valve Bulb 24. USDA Probe Receptacle PR3
12. Evaporator Expansion Valve 25. Cargo Probe Receptacle PR4
13. Quench Expansion Valve
Figure 2-2 Evaporator Section
T-320 2-2
2.1.4 Compressor Section compressor power plug, the discharge pressure
transducer and the suction pressure transducers.
The compressor section includes the compressor (with
high pressure switch) and the oil separator. The supply temperature sensor, supply recorder sensor
and ambient sensor are located at the left side of the
This section also contains the oil return solenoid, compressor.
2
3
4
5
25 10 11
24
23 12
13
22
14
Discharge
21 15 Connection
13 (Hidden)
16
12 Economizer
9 Connection
Suction
18 17 Connection
8 Oil Return
19 Connection
7 6
20
1. Compressor Guard 14. Economizer Service Valve/Connection

2. Supply Temperature Sensor 15. Suction Service Valve/Connection
3. Supply Recorder Sensor 16. Discharge Temperature Sensor
4. Ambient Sensor 17. Oil Return Service Valve (Std. tubing only)
5. Supply Air Thermometer Port (location) 18. Discharge Pressure Transducer
6. Oil Drain 19. Oil Return Solenoid Valve
7. Compressor 20. Oil Separator
8. Compressor Sight Glass 21. From Economizer
9. Compressor Power Plug 22. To Condenser
10. Discharge Service Valve/Connection 23. From Suction Modulating Valve
11. High Pressure Switch 24. Suction Strainer
12. Access Valve (Std. tubing only) 25. Suction Pressure Transducer
13. Access Valve
Figure 2-3 Compressor Section
2-3 T-320
2.1.5 Air Cooled Condenser Section The condenser fan pulls air in the bottom of the coil and it
is discharged horizontally out through the condenser fan
The air cooled condenser section (Figure 2-4) consists grille.
of the condenser fan, condenser coil, receiver, sight This section also contains the economizer, economizer
glass/moisture indicator, liquid line service valve, solenoid valve, economizer expansion valve and the
filter-drier and fusible plug. unloader solenoid valve.
5
4 6
2 3
7
1
8
9
10
11 12
27 13
26 22
21 15 14
25 16
20 17
24
23 18
19
1. Grille and Venturi Assembly 15. From Compressor Discharge

2. Condenser Fan 16. Discharge Pressure Transducer
3. Key 17. Oil Separator
4. Condenser Fan Motor 18. To Oil Return Solenoid
5. Condenser Coil 19. Receiver
6. Condenser Motor Mounting Bracket 20. Sight Glass/Moisture Indicator
7. Condenser Coil Cover 21. Sight Glass
8. Economizer 22. Fusible Plug
9. To Evaporator Expansion Valve 23. Liquid Line Service Valve/Connection
10. Unloader Solenoid Valve 24. Access Valve
11. From Condenser 25. Filter-Drier
12. To Condenser 26. Economizer Expansion Valve
13. To Compressor Economizer Connection 27. Economizer Solenoid Valve
14. From Unloader Solenoid Valve
Figure 2-4 Condenser Section
T-320 2-4
2.1.6 Water-Cooled Condenser Section The water cooled condenser replaces the standard unit
receiver.
The water-cooled condenser section (Figure 2-5) This section also contains the economizer, economizer
consists of a water-cooled condenser, sight glass, solenoid valve, economizer expansion valve,
rupture disc, filter-drier, water couplings and water moisture/liquid indicator and the unloader solenoid
pressure switch. valve.
1 2 3 4
5
6
24
9
10
23
11
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15 14 13 12
15
1. Economizer 13. Water Pressure Switch

2. To Evaporator Expansion Valve 14. Coupling (Water In)
3. Unloader Solenoid Valve 15. Water Connection Caps
4. Rupture Disc 16. Self Draining Coupling (Water Out)
5. Discharge Pressure Transducer 17. Water-Cooled Condenser
6. From Air Cooled Condenser 18. Sight Glass
7. To Air Cooled Condenser 19. Access Valve
8. To Compressor Economizer Connection 20. Liquid Line Service Valve/Connection
9. From Unloader Solenoid Valve 21. Moisture/Liquid Indicator
10. From Compressor Discharge 22. Filter-Drier
11. Oil Return Solenoid Valve 23. Economizer Expansion Valve
12. Oil Separator 24. Economizer Solenoid Valve
Figure 2-5 Water-Cooled Condenser Section
2-5 T-320
2.1.7 Control Box Section 2.1.8 Communications Interface Module
The control box (Figure 2-6) includes the manual The communications interface module is a slave
operation switches; circuit breaker (CB-1); compressor, module which allow communication with a master
fan and heater contactors; control power transformer; central monitoring station. The module will respond to
fuses; key pad; display module; current sensor module; communication and return information over the main
controller module expansion module and the power line. Refer to the master system technical manual
communications interface module. for further information.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8
1. Compressor Phase A Contactor 10. Interrogator Connector (Box Location)

2. Compressor Phase B Contactor 11. Fan Mode Switch
3. Heater Contactor 12. Emergency Bypass Switch
4. Display Module 13. Control Transformer
5. Communications Interface Module 14. Evaporator Fan Contactor - High
6. Controller/DataCORDER Module (Controller) 15. Evaporator Fan Contactor - Low
7. Key Pad 16. Condenser Fan Contactor
8. Remote Monitoring Receptacle 17. Circuit Breaker -- 460V
9. Controller Battery Pack 18. Current Sensor Module
Figure 2-6 Control Box Section
T-320 2-6
2.2 REFRIGERATION SYSTEM DATA
Model RSH105
Weight (Dry) 46.5 kg (103 lb)
Approved Oil Mobil -- ST32
a Compressor/Motor
a.
Assembly Oil Charge 2957 ml (100 ounces)
The oil level range, with the compressor off,
Oil Sight Glass should be between the bottom and one-eighth
level of the sight glass.
Verify at --18 _C
b. Evaporator Expansion (0 _F) container box 4.4 to 6.7 _C (8 to 12 _F)
Valve Superheat temperature
c. Economizer Expansion 4.4 to 11.1 _C (8 to 20 _F)
Valve Superheat
Opens 54 (¦ 3) _C = 130 (¦ 5) _F
d Heater Termination Thermostat
d.
Closes 38 (¦ 4) _C = 100 (¦ 7) _F
Cutout 25 (¦ 1.0) kg/cm@ = 350 (¦ 10) psig
e High Pressure Switch
e.
Cut-In 18 (¦ 0.7) kg/cm@ = 250 (¦ 10) psig
Unit Configuration Charge Requirements -- R-134a
Water-Cooled 5.56 kg
f. Refrigerant
g Charge
g Condenser (12.25 lbs)
Receiver 5.22kg
(11.5 lbs)
Melting point 99 _C = (210 _F)
g Fusible Plug
g.
Torque 6.2 to 6.9 mkg (45 to 50 ft-lbs)
h. Sight Glass/Moisture Indicator Torque 8.9 to 9.7 mkg (65 to 70 ft-lbs)
Bursts at 35 ¦ 5% kg/cm@ = (500 ¦ 5% psig)
i Rupture Disc
i.
Torque 6.2 to 6.9 mkg (45 to 50 ft-lbs)
j. Unit Weight Refer to unit model number plate.
Cut-In 0.5 ¦ 0.2 kg/cm@ (7 ¦ 3 psig)
k Water Pressure Switch
k.
Cutout 1.6 ¦ 0.4 kg/cm@ (22 ¦ 5 psig)
2-7 T-320
2.3 ELECTRICAL DATA
CB-1 Trips at 29 amps
a. Circuit Breaker CB-2 (50 amp) Trips at 62.5 amps
CB-2 (70 amp) Trips at 87.5 amps
b. Compressor Full Load Amps (FLA) 13 amps @ 460 vac
Motor
380 vac, Single Phase, 460 vac, Single Phase,
50 hz 60 hz
c. Condenser Fan Full Load Amps 1.3 amps 1.6 amps
Motor Horsepower 0.43 hp 0.75 hp
Rotations Per Minute 1425 rpm 1725 rpm
Voltage and Frequency 360 -- 460 vac ¦ 2.5 hz 400 -- 500 vac ¦ 2.5 hz
Bearing Lubrication Factory lubricated, additional grease not required.
Rotation Counter-clockwise when viewed from shaft end.
Number of Heaters 1
Rating 750 watts +5 /--10 % @ 460 vac
d Drain Pan Heaters
d.
Resistance (cold) 285 ¦ 7.5% ohms @ 20 _C (68 _F)
Type Sheath
Number of Heaters 6
e. Evaporator Coil Rating 750 watts +5/--10% each @ 230 vac
Heaters Resistance (cold) 66.8 to 77.2 ohms @ 20 _C (68 _F)
Type Sheath
380 vac/50 hz 460 vac/60 hz
Full Load Amps
1.6 2.0
High Speed
Full Load Amps
0.8 1.0
Low Speed
Nominal Horsepower
0.70 0.84
High Speed
Nominal Horsepower
0.09 0.11
f. Evaporator Fan Low Speed
Motor(s) Rotations Per Minute
2850 rpm 3450 rpm
High Speed
Rotations Per Minute
1425 rpm 1750 rpm
Low Speed
Voltage and Frequency 360 -- 460 vac ± 1.25 hz 400 -- 500 vac ± 1.5 hz
Voltage & Frequency us-
180 -- 230 vac ± 1.25hz 200 -- 250 vac ± 1.5 hz
ing power autotransformer
Bearing Lubrication Factory lubricated, additional grease not required
Rotation CW when viewed from shaft end
Control Circuit 7.5 amps (F3A,F3B)
Controller/DataCORDER 5 amps (F1 & F2)
g Fuses
g.
Emergency Bypass 10 amps (FEB)
Emergency Defrost 5 amps (FED)
Electrical Output 0.5 VDC to 4.5 VDC over 90o range
h V
h. Vent PPositioning
ii i Supply Voltage 5VDC+10%
Sensor
Supply Current 5mA (typical)
T-320 2-8
Table 2.3 -- Continued
Orange wire Power
Red wire Output
Brown wire Ground
Input voltage 5 vdc
Output voltage 0 to 3.3 vdc
i Humidity Sensor
i.
Output voltage readings verses relative humidity (RH) percentage:
30% 0.99 V
50% 1.65 V
70% 2.31 V
90% 2.97 V
2.4 SAFETY AND PROTECTIVE DEVICES IP-CP or HPS will shut down the compressor.
Unit components are protected from damage by safety Open safety switch contacts on device IP-CM will shut
and protective devices listed in the following table. down the condenser fan motor.
These devices monitor the unit operating conditions and The entire refrigeration unit will shut down if one of the
open a set of electrical contacts when an unsafe following safety devices open: (a) Circuit Breaker(s); (b)
condition occurs. Fuse (F3A/F3B, 7.5A); or (c) Evaporator Fan Motor
Open safety switch contacts on either or both of devices Internal Protector(s) -- (IP-EM).
Table 2-1 Safety and Protective Devices
UNSAFE CONDITION DEVICE DEVICE SETTING

Circuit Breaker (CB-1) -- Manual Reset Trips at 29 amps (460 vac)
Excessive current draw Circuit Breaker (CB-2, 50 amp) --Manual Reset Trips at 62.5 amps (230 vac)
Circuit Breaker (CB-2, 70 amp) --Manual Reset Trips at 87.5 amps (230 vac)
Excessive current draw in the Fuse (F3A & F3B) 7.5 amp rating
control circuit
Excessive current draw by the Fuse (F1 & F2) 5 amp rating
controller
Excessive current draw by the Fuse (FEB) 10 amp rating
emergency bypass module
Excessive current draw by the Fuse (FED) 5 amp rating
emergency defrost module
Excessive condenser fan mo- Internal Protector (IP-CM) -- Automatic Reset N/A
tor winding temperature
Excessive compressor motor Internal Protector (IP-CP) -- Automatic Reset N/A
winding temperature
Excessive evaporator fan mo- Internal Protector(s) (IP-EM) -- Automatic Reset N/A
tor(s) winding temperature
Abnormal pressures/tempera- Fusible Plug -- Used on the Receiver 93 _C = (200 _F)

tures in the high refrigerant
side Rupture Disc -- Used on the Water-Cooled Con- 35 kg/cm@ = (500 psig)
denser
Abnormally high discharge High Pressure Switch (HPS) Opens at 25 kg/cm@
pressure (350 psig)
2-9 T-320
2.5 REFRIGERATION CIRCUIT 2.5.2 Economized Operation
2.5.1 Standard Operation In the economized mode the frozen and pull down
Starting at the compressor, (see Figure 2-7, upper capacity of the unit is increased by subcooling the liquid
schematic) the suction gas is compressed to a higher refrigerant entering the evaporator expansion valve.
pressure and temperature. Overall efficiency is increased because the gas leaving
the economizer enters the compressor at a higher
In the standard mode, both the economizer and pressure, therefore requiring less energy to compress it
unloader solenoid valves (USV) are closed. The gas to the required condensing conditions.
flows through the discharge line into the oil separator. In
the separator, oil is removed from the refrigerant and During economized operation, flow of refrigerant
stored for return to the compressor when the oil return through the main refrigerant system is identical to the
solenoid valve (ORV) is opened by the controller. The oil standard mode. (The unloader solenoid valve is
return solenoid valve is a normally open valve which de--energized [closed] by the controller.)
allows return of oil during the off cycle.
The refrigerant gas continues into the air-cooled
condenser. When operating with the air-cooled Liquid refrigerant for use in the economizer circuit is
condenser active, air flowing across the coil fins and taken from the main liquid line as it leaves the filter--drier
tubes cools the gas to saturation temperature. By (see Figure 2-8). The flow is activated when the
removing latent heat, the gas condenses to a high controller energizes the economizer solenoid valve
pressure/high temperature liquid and flows to the (ESV). The liquid refrigerant flows through the
receiver which stores the additional charge necessary economizer expansion valve and the economizer
for low temperature operation. internal passages absorbing heat from the liquid
refrigerant flowing to the evaporator expansion valve.
When operating with the water cooled condenser active The resultant “medium” temperature/pressure gas
(see Figure 2-7, lower schematic), the refrigerant gas enters the compressor at the economizer line.
passes through the air cooled condenser and enters the
water cooled condenser shell. The water flowing inside 2.5.3 Unloaded Operation
the tubing cools the gas to saturation temperature in the
same manner as the air passing over the air cooled The system will operate in the unloaded mode; during
condenser. The refrigerant condenses on the outside of periods of low load, during periods of required discharge
the tubes and exits as a high temperature liquid. The pressure or current limiting, and during start--up.
water cooled condenser also acts as a receiver, storing
excess refrigerant. During unloaded operation, flow of refrigerant through
The liquid refrigerant continues through the liquid line, the main refrigerant system is identical to the standard
the filter-drier (which keeps refrigerant clean and dry) mode. (The economizer solenoid valve is de--energized
and the economizer (which is not active during standard [closed] by the controller.)
operation) to the evaporator expansion valve. As the
liquid refrigerant passes through the variable orifice of In the unloaded mode, a portion of the mid--stage
the expansion valve, some of it vaporizes into a gas compressed gas is bypassed to decrease compressor
(flash gas). Heat is absorbed from the return air by the capacity. The flow is activated when the controller opens
balance of the liquid, causing it to vaporize in the the unloader solenoid valve (see Figure 2-9). Opening
evaporator coil. The vapor then flows through the of the valve creates a bypass from the economizer
suction modulation valve to the compressor. service valve through the unloader solenoid valve and
into the suction line on the outlet side of the suction
The evaporator expansion valve is activated by the bulb pressure modulation valve.
strapped to the suction line near the evaporator outlet.
The valve maintains a constant superheat at the coil As load on the system decreases, the suction
outlet regardless of load conditions. modulating valve decreases flow of refrigerant to the
On systems fitted with a water pressure switch, the compressor. This action balances the compressor
condenser fan will be off when there is sufficient capacity with the load and prevents operation with low
pressure to open the switch. If water pressure drops coil temperatures. In this mode of operation, the quench
below the switch cut out setting, the condenser fan will valve will open as required to provide sufficient liquid
be automatically started. When operating a system refrigerant flow into the suction line for cooling of the
fitted with a condenser fan switch, the condenser fan will compressor motor. The quench valve senses
be off when the switch is placed in the “O” position. The refrigerant condition entering the compressor and
condenser fan will be on when the switch is placed in the modulates the flow to prevent entrance of liquid into the
“I” position. compressor.
T-320 2-10
STANDARD OPERATION WITH RECEIVER
EVAPORATOR
TXV BULB SMV
TXV
QUENCH
CONDENSER TXV
USV
QUENCH
TXV
BULB
ECONOMIZER
TXV BULB
ESV
ECONOMIZER DISCHARGE
TXV SERVICE
CONNECTION
SIGHT GLASS
ECONOMIZER ECONOMIZER
SERVICE
FILTER CONNECTION
FUSIBLE PLUG
DRIER
ORV SUCTION SERVICE

MOISTURE INDICATOR CONNECTION
LIQUID LINE
SERVICE
CONNECTION OIL SEPARATOR
OIL RETURN
RECEIVER SERVICE VALVE
COMPRESSOR
DISCHARGE LIQUID SUCTION
STANDARD OPERATION WITH WATER COOLED CONDENSER

EVAPORATOR
TXV BULB SMV
TXV
QUENCH
CONDENSER TXV
USV
QUENCH
TXV
BULB
ECONOMIZER
TXV BULB
DISCHARGE
SERVICE
ESV ECONOMIZER
CONNECTION
RUPTURE DISC
ECONOMIZER
ECONOMIZER SERVICE
TXV CONNECTION
FILTER
DRIER
SIGHT GLASS
MOISTURE INDICATOR
ORV
SUCTION SERVICE
LIQUID LINE CONNECTION
SERVICE
CONNECTION OIL SEPARATOR OIL RETURN
WATER COOLED
SERVICE VALVE
CONDENSER
COMPRESSOR
DISCHARGE LIQUID SUCTION
Figure 2-7 Refrigeration Circuit Schematic -- Standard Operation
2-11 T-320
ECONOMIZER
ESV
ECONOMIZER
TXV
ECONOMIZER
SERVICE
CONNECTION
OIL SEPARATOR
LIQUID LINE
SERVICE CON- RECEIVER
NECTION
LIQUID ECONOMIZER
PRESSURE
Figure 2-8 Refrigeration Circuit Schematic -- Economized Operation
TXV BULB SMV
TXV
QUENCH TXV
USV
SUCTION SERVICE VALVE

OIL SEPARATOR
RECEIVER
LIQUID ECONOMIZER SUCTION

PRESSURE
Figure 2-9 Refrigeration Circuit Schematic -- Unloaded Operation
T-320 2-12
SECTION 3
MICROPROCESSOR
3.1 TEMPERATURE CONTROL MICROPRO- operating parameters and cargo temperature
CESSOR SYSTEM parameters for future retrieval. Coverage of the
temperature control software begins with paragraph
The temperature control Micro-Link 3 microprocessor 3.2. Coverage of the DataCORDER software is
system (see Figure 3- 1) consists of a key pad, display provided in paragraph 3.6.
module, the control module (controller) and
interconnecting wiring. The controller houses the The key pad and display module serve to provide user
temperature control software and the DataCORDER access and readouts for both of the controller functions,
Software. The temperature control software functions to temperature control and DataCORDER. The functions
operate the unit components as required to provide the are accessed by key pad selections and viewed on the
desired cargo temperature and humidity. The display module. The components are designed to
DataCORDER software functions to record unit permit ease of installation and removal.
CONTROL MODULE DISPLAY MODULE
TEMPERATURE CONTROL SOFTWARE

KEY PAD
CONFIGURATION OPERATIONAL ALARMS PRE--TRIP

SOFTWARE SOFTWARE (AL<70)
INTERROGATION
CONNECTOR
CONFIGURATION FUNCTION TO
VARIABLE DISPLAY
CODE (Cd)
(CnF##)
DATAREADER
DataCORDER SOFTWARE
DATA
CONFIGURATION OPERATIONAL ALARMS STORAGE Computer Device
SOFTWARE SOFTWARE (AL>68) MEMORY With DataLine
Software
CONFIGURATION FUNCTION TO TO
VARIABLE DISPLAY DISPLAY
CODE (dC)
(dCF## read only) (Scrollback)
Figure 3- 1 Temperature Control System
3-1 T-320
3.1.1 Key Pad Table 3-1 Key Pad Function
The key pad (Figure 3- 2) is mounted on the right-hand KEY FUNCTION
side of the control box. The key pad consists of eleven
push button switches that act as the user’s interface Code Select Accesses function codes.
with the controller. Descriptions of the switch functions Displays the pre-trip selection menu.
are provided in Table 3-1. Pre-Trip
Discontinues pre-trip in progress.
Alarm List Displays alarm list and clears the
alarm queue .
PRE
Manual Displays selected defrost mode. De-
CODE
TRIP
Defrost/ pressing and holding the Defrost in-
SELECT
Interval terval key for five (5) seconds will ini-
MANUAL
tiate defrost using the same logic as
ALARM DEFROST/ if the optional manual defrost switch
LIST INTERVAL was toggled on.
Enter Confirms a selection or saves a

selection to the controller
Arrow Up Change or scroll a selection upward
ENTER Pre-trip advance or test interruption.
Arrow Down Change or scroll a selection down-
ward. Pre-trip repeat backward
Return/ Displays non-controlling probe tem-
Supply perature (momentary display).
Displays alternate English/Metric
scale (momentary display). When set
RETURN _C
to _F, pressure is displayed in psig
SUPPLY _F and vacuum in “/hg. “P” appears after
_C/_F the value to indicate psig and “i” ap-
BATTERY ALT. pears for inches of mercury.
POWER MODE
When set to _C. pressure readings
are in bars. “b” appears after the val-
ue to indicate bars.
Initiate battery backup mode to allow
Figure 3- 2 Key Pad Battery set point and function code selection
Power if AC power is not connected.
This key is pressed to switch the
functions from the temperature soft-
COOL HEAT DEFROST IN RANGE ALARM SUPPLY RETURN ware to the DataCORDER Software.
ALT. Mode The remaining keys function the
same as described above except the
readings or changes are made to the
DataCORDER programming.
SETPOINT/Code AIR TEMPERATURE/Data
NOTE
The controlling probe in the perishable range
will be the SUPPLY air probe and the controlling
probe in the frozen range will be the RETURN
Figure 3- 3 Display Module air probe.
3.1.2 Display Module
5. Supply -- Yellow LED: Energized when the supply air
The display module (Figure 3- 3) consists of five digit probe is used for control. When this LED is illuminated,
displays and seven indicator lights. The indicator lights the temperature displayed in the AIR TEMPERATURE
include: display is the reading at the supply air probe. This LED
1. Cool -- White LED: Energized when the refrigerant will flash if dehumidification or humidification is en-
compressor is energized. abled.
2. Heat -- Orange LED: Energized to indicate heater op- 6. Return -- Yellow LED: Energized when the return air
eration in the heat or defrost mode. probe is used for control. When this LED is illuminated,
the temperature displayed in the AIR TEMPERATURE
3. Defrost -- Orange LED: Energized when the unit is in display is the reading at the return air probe. This LED
the defrost mode. will flash if dehumidification or humidification is en-
abled.
4. In-Range -- Green LED: Energized when the con-
trolled temperature probe is within specified tolerance 7. Alarm -- Red LED: Energized when there is an active
of set point. or an inactive shutdown alarm in the alarm queue.
T-320 3-2
1 2 3 3 4 5 3 6 7 3 8 3
1. Mounting Screw 5. Fuses

2. Micro-Link 3 Control/DataCORDER Module 6. Control Circuit Power Connection
3. Connectors 7. Software Programming Port
4. Test Points 8. Battery Pack
Figure 3- 4 Control Module
3.1.3 Controller b. Provide default independent readouts of set point and
supply or return air temperatures.
c. Provide ability to read and (if applicable) modify the
CAUTION Configuration Software Variables, Operating Soft-
ware Function Codes and Alarm Code Indications.
Do not remove wire harnesses from con-
troller modules unless you are grounded to d. Provide a Pre-Trip step-by-step checkout of refrigera-
tion unit performance including: proper component
the unit frame with a static safe wrist strap. operation, electronic and refrigeration control opera-
tion, heater operation, probe calibration, pressure
limiting and current limiting settings.
CAUTION e. Provide battery powered ability to access or change
selected codes and set point without AC power con-
Unplug all controller module wire harness nected
connectors before performing arc welding
on any part of the container. f. Provide the ability to reprogram the software through
the use of a memory card.
3.2.1 Configuration Software
CAUTION (Configuration Variables)
The Configuration Software is a variable listing of the
Do not attempt to use an ML2i PC card in an components available for use by the Operational
ML3 equipped unit. The PC cards are physi- Software. This software is factory installed in
cally different and will result in damage to accordance with the equipment fitted and options listed
the controller. on the original purchase order. Changes to the
Configuration Software are required only when a new
NOTE controller has been installed or a physical change has
Do not attempt to service the controller mod- been made to the unit such as the addition or removal of
an option. A Configuration Variable list is provided in
ules. Breaking the seal will void the warranty. Table 3-4. Change to the factory installed Configuration
The Micro--Link 3 controller is a dual module Software is achieved via a configuration card or by
microprocessor as shown in Figure 3- 4. It is fitted with communications.
test points, harness connectors and a software card 3.2.2 Operational Software (Function codes)
programming port.
The Operational Software is the actual operation
3.2 CONTROLLER SOFTWARE programming of the controller which activates or
deactivates components in accordance with current unit
The controller software is a custom designed program operating conditions and operator selected modes of
that is subdivided into the Configuration Software and operation.
the Operational Software. The controller software
performs the following functions: The programming is divided into function Codes. Some
of the codes are read only while the remaining codes
a. Control supply or return air temperature to required may be user configured. The value of the user
limits, provide modulated refrigeration operation, configurable codes can be assigned in accordance with
economized operation, unloaded operation, electric user desired mode of operation. A list of the function
heat control and defrost. Defrost is performed to clear codes is provided in Table 3-5.
build up of frost and ice and ensure proper air flow
across the coil. To access the function codes, perform the following:
3-3 T-320
a. Press the CODE SELECT key, then press an arrow Defrost interval time is not accumulated in any mode
key until the left window displays the desired code until the defrost termination sensor reads less than
number. 10_C (50_F).
b. The right window will display the value of this item for 3.3.3 Failure Action
five seconds before returning to the normal display Function code Cd29 may be operator set to allow
mode. continued operation in the event that all of the control
c. If a longer time is desired, press the ENTER key to sensors are reading out of range. The factory default is
extend the time to 30 seconds. full system shutdown. Refer to Table 3-5.
3.3.4 Generator Protection
3.3 MODES OF OPERATION
Function codes Cd31(Stagger Start, Offset Time) and
The Operational Software responds to various inputs. Cd32 (Current Limit) may be operator set to control start
These inputs come from the temperature and pressure up sequence of multiple units and operating current
sensors, the temperature set point, the settings of the draw. The factory default allows on demand starting (no
the configuration variables and the function code delay) of units and normal current draw. Refer to
assignments. The action taken by the Operational Table 3-5.
Software will change if any one of the inputs changes.
Overall interaction of the inputs is described as a “mode” 3.3.5 Compressor High Temperature, Low Pres-
of operation. The modes of operation include, sure Protection.
perishable (chill) mode and frozen mode. Descriptions The controller monitors compressor discharge
of the controller interaction and modes of operation are temperature and suction pressure. If discharge
provided in the following sub paragraphs. pressure rises above the allowed limit or suction
3.3.1 Temperature Control -- Perishable Mode pressure falls below the allowed limit the compressor
will be cycled off on a three minute timer. Condenser and
With configuration variable CnF26 (Heat Lockout evaporator fans continue to operate during the
Temperature) set to --10_C the perishable mode of compressor off cycle.
operation is active with set points above --10_C (+14_F).
With the variable set to --5_C, the perishable mode is 3.3.6 Perishable Mode -- Conventional
active below --5_C (+23_F). Refer to Table 3-4. The unit is capable of maintaining supply air
temperature to within ¦0.25_C (¦0.5_F) of set point.
When in the perishable mode the controller maintains Supply air temperature is controlled by positioning of the
the supply air temperature at set point, the SUPPLY suction modulation valve (SMV), cycling of the
indicator light will be illuminated on the display module compressor and cycling of the heaters.
and the default reading on the display window will be the
supply temperature sensor reading. When cooling from a temperature that is more than
2.5_C (4.5_F) above set point, the system will be in the
When the supply air temperature enters the in-range perishable pull down mode. It will be in economized
temperature tolerance (as selected at function code operation with a target SMV position of 100% open.
Cd30), the in-range light will energize. However, pressure and current limit functions may
3.3.2 Defrost Interval restrict the valve, if either exceeds the preset value.
Controller function code Cd27 sets two modes for Once set point is reached, the unit will transition to the
defrost initiation, either user--selected timed intervals or perishable steady state mode. This results in unloaded
automatic control. The user--selected values are 3, 6, 9, operation with some restriction of the SMV. The SMV
12, or 24 hours and the factory default for the timed will continue to close and restrict refrigerant flow until the
interval is 12 hours (some units may be configured to capacity of the unit and the load are balanced.
allow defrost to be disabled altogether; in this case a If the SMV is at minimum modulation, the controller has
user--selected value of OFF will be available). Refer to determined that cooling is not required, or the controller
Table 3-5. logic determines suction pressure is at the low pressure
In perishable mode, perishable--pulldown mode, or limit, the unit will transition to the perishable idle mode.
frozen--pulldown mode, automatic defrost starts with an The compressor is turned off and the evaporator fans
initial defrost set to 3 hours and then adjusts the interval continue to run to circulate air throughout the container.
to the next defrost based on the accumulation of ice on If temperature rises above set point +0.2_C, the unit will
the evaporator coil. In this way, defrosts are scheduled transition back to the perishable steady state mode
to occur only when necessary. If the temperature drops to 0.5_C (0.9_F) below set
Once setpoint has been reached in frozen operation, the point, the unit will transition to the perishable heating
automatic selection will set the time interval to 12 hours mode and the heaters will be energized . The unit will
for the first two defrosts once the return probe is reading transition back to the perishable idle mode when the
below the frozen setpoint and then adjust to 24 hours temperature rises to 0.2_C (0.4_F) below the set point
thereafter. and the heaters will de-energize
3.3.7 Perishable Mode -- Economy
All defrost interval times reflect the number of
compressor runtime hours since the last defrost de--ice The economy mode is an extension of the conventional
cycle. The minimum defrost interval under the mode. The mode is activated when the setting of
automatic setting is 3 hours while the maximum is 24. In function code Cd34 is “ON”. Economy mode is provided
frozen mode the amount of wall--clock time necessary to for power saving purposes. Economy mode could be
accumulate a given amount of defrost interval time will utilized in the transportation of temperature tolerant
exceed the defrost interval time by a factor of two to cargo or non-respiration items which do not require high
three depending on the compressor duty--cycle. airflow for removing respiration heat. There is no active
T-320 3-4
display indicator that economy mode has been Two timers are activated in the dehumidification mode
activated. To check for economy mode, perform a to prevent rapid cycling and consequent contactor wear.
manual display of code Cd34. They are:
In order to achieve economy mode, a perishable set 1. Heater debounce timer (three minutes).
point must be selected prior to activation. When 2. Out-of-range timer (five minutes).
economy mode is active, the evaporator fans will be
controlled as follows: The heater debounce timer is started whenever the
heater contactor status is changed. The heat contactor
At the start of each cooling or heating cycle, the remains energized (or de-energized) for at least three
evaporator fans will be run in high speed for three minutes even if the set point criteria are satisfied.
minutes. They will then be switched to low speed any The out-of-range timer is started to maintain heater
time the supply air temperature is within ¦ 0.25_C operation during a temporary out-of-range condition. If
(0.45_F) of the set point and the return air temperature the supply air temperature remains outside of the user
is less than or equal to the supply air temperature + 3_C selected in-range setting for more than five minutes, the
(5.4_F). The fans will continue to run in low speed for heaters will be de-energized to allow the system to
one hour. At the end of the hour, the evaporator fans will recover. The out-of-range timer starts as soon as the
switch back to high speed and the cycle will be repeated. temperature exceeds the in-range tolerance value set
If bulb mode is active, the economy fan activity will be by function code Cd30.
overwritten.
3.3.9 Perishable, Dehumidification -- Bulb Mode
3.3.8 Perishable Mode -- Dehumidification
Bulb mode is an extension of the dehumidification mode
The dehumidification mode is provided to reduce the which allows changes to the evaporator fan speed
humidity levels inside the container. The mode is and/or defrost termination set points.
activated when a humidity value is set at at function Bulb mode is active when configuration code Cd35 is set
code Cd33. The display module SUPPLY led will flash to “Bulb”. Once the bulb mode is activated, the user may
ON and OFF every second to indicate that the then change the dehumidification mode evaporator fan
dehumidification mode is active. Once the Mode is operation from the default (speed alternates from low to
active and the following conditions are satisfied, the high each hour) to constant low or constant high speed.
controller will activate the heat relay to begin This is done by toggling function code Cd36 from its
dehumidification. default of “alt” to “Lo” or “Hi” as desired. If low speed
evaporator fan operation is selected, this gives the user
1. The humidity sensor reading is above the set point. the additional capability of selecting dehumidification
set points from 60 to 95% (instead of the normal 65 to
2. The unit is in the perishable steady state mode and 95%).
supply air temperature is less than 0.25_C above set
point. In addition, if bulb mode is active, function code Cd37
may be set to override the previous defrost termination
3. The heater debounce timer (three minutes) has thermostat settings. (Refer to paragraph 4.10.5.) The
timed out. temperature at which the defrost termination thermostat
will be considered “open” may be changed [in 0.1_C
4. Heater termination thermostat (HTT) is closed. (0.2_F) increments] to any value between 25.6_C
(78_F) and 4_C (39.2_F) . The temperature at which the
If the above conditions are true the evaporator fans will defrost termination thermostat is considered closed for
switch from high to low speed operation. The evaporator interval timer start or demand defrost is 10_C for “open”
fan speed will switch every hour thereafter as long as all values from 25.6_C (78_F) down to a 10_C setting. For
conditions are met (see Bulb Mode section for different “open” values lower than 10_C, the “closed” values will
evaporator fan speed options). If any condition except decrease to the same value as the “open” setting. Bulb
for item (1) becomes false OR if the relative humidity mode is terminated when:
sensed is 2% below the dehumidification set point, the
high speed evaporator fans will be energized. 1. Bulb mode code Cd35 is set to “Nor.”
2. Dehumidification code Cd33 is set to “Off.”
In the dehumidification mode power is applied to the
defrost and drain pan heaters. This added heat load 3. The user changes the set point to one that is in the
causes the controller to open the suction modulating frozen range.
valve to match the increased heat load while still holding When bulb mode is disabled by any of the above, the
the supply air temperature very close to the set point. evaporator fan operation for dehumidification reverts to
“alt” and the DTS termination setting resets to the value
Opening the modulating valve reduces the temperature determined by controller configuration variable CnF41.
of the evaporator coil surface, which increases the rate
at which water is condensed from the passing air. 3.3.10 Temperature Control -- Frozen Mode
Removing water from the air reduces the relative With configuration variable CnF26 (Heat Lockout
humidity. When the relative humidity sensed is 2% Temperature) set to --10_C the frozen mode of operation
below the set point , the controller de-energizes the heat is active with set points at or below --10_C (+14_F). With
relay. The controller will continue to cycle heating to the variable set to --5_C, the frozen mode is active at or
maintain relative humidity below the selected set point. below --5_C (+23_F).
If the mode is terminated by a condition other than the
humidity sensor, e.g., an out-of-range or compressor When in the frozen mode the controller maintains the
shutdown condition, the heat relay is de-energized return air temperature at set point, the RETURN
immediately. indicator light will be illuminated on the display module
3-5 T-320
and the default reading on the display window will be the The alarm philosophy balances the protection of the
return air probe reading. refrigeration unit and that of the refrigerated cargo. The
action taken when an error is detected always considers
When the return air temperature enters the in-range the survival of the cargo. Rechecks are made to confirm
temperature tolerance as selected at function code that an error actually exists.
Cd30, the in-range light will energize.
Some alarms requiring compressor shutdown have
3.3.11 Frozen Mode -- Conventional time delays before and after to try to keep the
compressor on line. An example is alarm code “LO”,
Frozen range cargos are not sensitive to minor (low main voltage), when a voltage drop of over 25%
temperature changes. The method of temperature occurs, an indication is given on the display, but the unit
control employed in this range takes advantage of this to will continue to run.
greatly improve the energy efficiency of the unit.
Temperature control in the frozen range is When an Alarm Occurs:
accomplished by cycling the compressor on and off as
the load demand requires. a. The red alarm light will illuminate for alarm code num-
bers 13, 15, 17, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26, and 27.
When cooling from a temperature that is more than
2.5_C (4.5_F) above set point, the system will be in the b. If a detectable problem is found to exist, its alarm
frozen pull down mode. It will transition to economized code will be alternately displayed with the set point on
operation with a target SMV position of 100% open. the left display.
However, pressure and current limit functions may c. The user should scroll through the alarm list to deter-
restrict the valve, if either exceeds the preset value. mine what alarms exist or have existed. Alarms must
Once set point is reached, the unit will transition to the be diagnosed and corrected before the Alarm List can
frozen steady state mode. (Economized operation with be cleared.
maximum allowed suction modulating valve opening.) To Display Alarm Codes :
When temperature drops to set point minus 0.2_C and a. While in the Default Display mode, press the ALARM
the compressor has run for at least five minutes, the unit LIST key. This accesses the Alarm List Display Mode,
will transition to the frozen idle mode. The compressor is which displays any alarms archived in the Alarm
turned off and the evaporator fans continue to run to Queue.
circulate air throughout the container. If temperature
rises above set point +0.2_C, the unit will transition back b. The alarm queue stores up to 16 alarms in the se-
to the frozen steady state mode. quence in which they occurred. The user may scroll
through the list by depressing an ARROW key.
If the temperature drops 10_C below set point, the unit
will transition to the frozen “heating” mode. In the frozen c. The left display will show “AL##,” where ## is the
heating mode the evaporator fans are brought to high alarm number sequentially in the queue.
speed. The unit will transition back to the frozen steady
state mode when the temperature rises back to the d. The right display will show the actual alarm code.
transition point. “AA##” will display for an active alarm, where “##” is
the alarm code. Or “IA##” will display for an inactive
3.3.12 Frozen Mode -- Economy alarm, See Table 3-6, page 3-16,
In order to activate economy frozen mode operation, a e. “END” is displayed to indicate the end of the alarm list
frozen set point temperature must be selected. The if any alarms are active.
economy mode is active when function code Cd34 is set f. “CLEAr” is displayed if all alarms are inactive. The
to “ON”. When economy mode frozen is active, the alarm queue may than be cleared by pressing the EN-
system will perform normal frozen mode operations TER key. The alarm list will clear and “ -- -- -- -- -- ” will
except that the entire refrigeration system, excluding be displayed.
the controller, will be turned off when the control
temperature is less than or equal to the set point -- 2_C.
After an off-cycle period of 60 minutes, the unit will turn Note:
on high speed evaporator fans for three minutes, and AL26 is active when all of the sensors are not
then check the control temperature. If the control
temperature is greater than or equal to the set point + responding. Check the connector at the back of
0.2_C., the unit will restart the refrigeration system and the controller, if it is loose or unplugged, recon-
continue to cool until the previously mentioned off-cycle nect it. Then run a pretrip test (P5) to clear
temperature criteria are met. If the control temperature AL26.
is less than the set point + 0.2_C, the unit will turn off the
evaporator fans and restart another 60 minute off-cycle.
3.5. UNIT PRE-TRIP DIAGNOSTICS
3.4 CONTROLLER ALARMS Pre--Trip Diagnostics is an independent controller
function which will suspend normal refrigeration
Alarm display is an independent controller software controller activities and provide preprogrammed test
function. If an operating parameter is outside of routines. The test routines include Auto Mode testing,
expected range or a component does not return the which automatically preforms a pre programmed
correct signals back to the controller an alarm is sequenced of tests, or Manual Mode testing, which
generated. A listing of the alarms is provided in allows the operator to select and run any of the
Table 3-6, page 3-16. individual tests.
T-320 3-6
d. Records DataCORDER and temperature control
CAUTION software generated data and events as follows:
Container ID Change
Pre-trip inspection should not be per- Software Upgrades
formed with critical temperature cargoes in Alarm Activity
the container. Battery Low (Battery Pack)
Data Retrieval
CAUTION Defrost Start and End
Dehumidification Start and End
When Pre-Trip key is pressed, economy, de- Power Loss (w/wo battery pack)
humidification and bulb mode will be deac- Power Up (w/wo battery pack)
tivated. At the completion of Pre-Trip activi- Remote Probe Temperatures in the Container
ty, economy, dehumidification and bulb (USDA Cold treatment and Cargo probe recording)
mode must be reactivated. Return Air Temperature
Testing may be initiated by use of the Key Pad or via Set Point Change
communication, but when initiated by communication Supply Air Temperature
the controller will execute the entire battery of tests
(auto mode). Real Time Clock Battery (Internal Battery) Replace-
ment
At the end of a pre-trip test, the message “P,” “rSLts”
(pretest results) will be displayed. Pressing the ENTER Real Time Clock Modification
key will allow the user to see the results for all subtests. Trip Start
The results will be displayed as “PASS” or “FAIL” for all ISO Trip Header (When entered via Interrogation
the tests run to completion. program)
A detailed description of the pre-trip tests and test codes Economy Mode Start and End
is provided in Table 3-7, page 3-20. detailed operating
instructions are provided in paragraph 4.8. “Auto 1/Auto 2/Auto3” Pre-Trip Start and End
Bulb Mode Start
3.6 DataCORDER Bulb Mode changes
3.6.1 Description Bulb Mode End
The Carrier Transicold “DataCORDER,” software is USDA Trip Comment
integrated into the controller and serves to eliminate the Humidification Start and End
temperature recorder and paper chart. The
DataCORDER functions may be accessed by key pad USDA Probe Calibration
selections and viewed on the display module. The unit is Fresh Air Vent Position
also fitted with interrogation connections (see 3.6.2 DataCORDER Software
Figure 3- 1) which may be used with the Carrier
Transicold Data Reader to down load data. A personal The DataCORDER Software is subdivided into the
computer with Carrier Transicold DataView/DataLine Configuration Software, Operational Software and the
software may also be used to download data and Data Memory.
configure settings. The DataCORDER consists of: a. Operational Software
Configuration Software The Operational Software reads and interprets inputs
Operational Software for use by the Configuration Software. The inputs are
Data Storage Memory labeled Function Codes. There are controller functions
Real Time Clock (with internal battery backup) (see Table 3-8, page 3-24) which the operator may
Six thermistor inputs access to examine the current input data or stored data.
Interrogation Connections To access these codes, do the following:
Power supply (battery pack). 1 Press the ALT. MODE & CODE SELECT keys.
The DataCORDER performs the following functions: 2 Press an arrow key until the left window displays the
a. Logs data at 15, 30, 60 or 120 minute intervals and desired code number. The right window will display
stores two years’ of data (based on one hour interval). the value of this item for five seconds before returning
to the normal display mode.
b. Records and displays alarms on the display module.
3 If a longer time is desired, press the ENTER key to
c. Records results of pre--trip testing. extend the time to 30 seconds.
3-7 T-320
Table 3-2 DataCORDER Configuration Variables
CONFIGURATION NO. TITLE DEFAULT OPTION

dCF01 (Future Use) ---- ----
dCF02 Sensor Configuration 2 2,5,6,9,54,64,94
dCF03 Logging Interval (Minutes) 60 15,30,60,120
dCF04 Thermistor Format Short Long
dCF05 Thermistor Sampling Type A A,b,C
dCF06 Controlled Atmosphere/Humidity Sampling Type A A,b
dCF07 Alarm Configuration USDA Sensor 1 A Auto, On, Off
dCF10 Alarm Configuration Cargo Sensor A Auto, On, Off
b. Configuration Software The inputs of the six thermistors (supply, return, USDA
The configuration software controls the recording and #1, #2, #3 and cargo probe) and the humidity sensor
alarm functions of the DataCORDER. Reprogramming input will be generated by the DataCORDER. See
to the factory installed configuration is achieved via a Figure 3- 5.
configuration card. Changes to the unit DataCORDER
configuration may be made made using the
DataView/DataLine interrogation software. A listing of
the configuration variables is provided in Table 3-2. NOTE
Descriptions of DataCORDER operation for each The DataCORDER software uses the supply
variable setting are provided in the following
paragraphs. and return recorder sensors (SRS,RRS). The
temperature control software uses the supply
3.6.3 Sensor Configuration (dCF02)
and return temperature sensors (STS,RTS) .
Two modes of operation may be configured, the
Standard Mode and the Generic Mode.
b. Generic Mode
a. Standard Mode
In the standard mode, the user may configure the The generic recording mode allows user selection of the
DataCORDER to record data using one of seven network data points to be recorded. The user may select
standard configurations. The seven standard
configuration variables, with their descriptions, are up to a total of eight data points for recording. A list of the
listed in Table 3-3. data points available for recording follows. Changing the
configuration to generic and selecting which data points
Table 3-3 DataCORDER Standard Configurations to record may be done using the Carrier Transicold Data
Retrieval Program.
Standard Description
Config. 1. Control mode
2 sensors 2. Control temperature
2 thermistor inputs(supply & return)
(dCF02=2) 3. Frequency
5 sensors 2 thermistor inputs(supply & return) 4. Humidity
(dCF02=5) 3 USDA thermistor inputs 5. Phase A current
6. Phase B current
2 thermistor inputs(supply & return)
6 sensors 3 USDA thermistor inputs 7. Phase C current
(dCF02=6) 1 humidity input 8. Main voltage
9. Suction modulation valve percentage
9 sensors Not Applicable 10. Discrete outputs (Bit mapped -- require special
(dCF02=9) handling if used)
2 thermistor inputs(supply & return) 11. Discrete inputs (Bit mapped -- require special
6 sensors 3 USDA thermistor inputs
(dCF02=54) 1 cargo probe (thermistor input) handling if used)
12. Ambient sensor
2 thermistor inputs(supply & return) 13. Compressor suction sensor
7 sensors 3 USDA thermistor inputs 14. Compressor discharge sensor
(dCF02=64) 1 humidity input 15. Return temperature sensor (RTS)
1 cargo probe (thermistor input) 16. Supply temperature sensor (STS)
2 thermistor inputs(supply & return) 17. Defrost temperature sensor
18. Discharge pressure transducer
10 sensors 3 USDA thermistor inputs 19. Suction pressure transducer
(dCF02=94) 1 humidity input 20. Condenser pressure transducer
1 cargo probe (thermistor input)
3 C.A. inputs (NOT APPLICABLE) 21. Vent position sensor (VPS)
T-320 3-8
Raw Data Report for ABC1234567
May 31, 2001 to Jun 04, 2001
System Configuration at the Time of Interrogation:
Interrogated On Sept 05, 2001
Extracted by DataLine Rev 1.0.0
Controller Software: 5120

Controller Serial #: 04163552
Bill of Lading #: 1
Origin: Origin Date:
Destination: Discharge Date:
Comment: DataLine Tool
Probe Calibration Readings: USDA1: 0.0 USDA2: 0.0 USDA3: 0.0 Cargo: 0.0
Temperature Units: Centigrade
________________________________________________________________________________________
May 31, 2001
Setpoint: 1.66, Container : Serial : 04189552
9 Sensors Logged at 15 Minute Interval
Sensor Format Resolution
Figure 3- 5 Standard Configuration Download Report
3-9 T-320
3.6.4 Logging Interval (dCF03) An alarm will be generated when the battery voltage
The user may select four different time intervals transitions from good to bad indicating that the battery
between data recordings. Data is logged at exact pack needs recharging. If the alarm condition persists
intervals in accordance with the real time clock. The for more than 24 hours on continuous AC power, the
clock is factory set at Greenwich Mean Time (GMT). battery pack needs replacement.
3.6.5 Thermistor Format (dCF04) 3.6.9 Pre-Trip Data Recording
The user may configure the format in which the The DataCORDER will record the initiation of a pre-trip
thermistor readings are recorded. The short resolution test (refer to paragraph 3.5) and the results of each of
is a 1 byte format and the long resolution is a 2 byte the tests included in pre--trip. The data is time-stamped
format. The short requires less memory and records and may be extracted via the Data Retrieval program.
temperature in 0.25°C (0.45°F) steps when in the Refer to Table 3-9 for a description of the data stored in
perishable mode or 0.5°C (0.9°F) steps when in the the DataCORDER for each corresponding Pre-Trip test.
frozen mode. The long records temperature in 0.01°C
(0.02°F) steps for the entire range. 3.6.10 DataCORDER Communications
3.6.6 Sampling Type (dCF05 & dCF06) Data retrieval from the DataCORDER can be
Three types of data sampling are available, average, accomplished by using one of the following;
snapshot and USDA. When configured to average, the DataReader, DataLine/DataView or a communications
average of readings taken every minute over the interface module.
recording period is recorded. When configured to NOTE
snapshot, the sensor reading at the log interval time is A DataReader, DataLine/DataView or a com-
recorded. When USDA is configured the supply and munications interface module display of Com-
return temperature readings are averaged and the 3 munication Failed is caused by faulty data
USDA probe readings are snapshot.
transfer between the datacorder and the data
3.6.7 Alarm Configuration (dCF07 -- dCF10)
retrival device. Common causes include:
The USDA and cargo probe alarms may be configured
to OFF, ON or AUTO. 1. Bad cable or connection between
If a probe alarm is configured to OFF, then the alarm for DataCORDER and data retrieval device.
this probe is always disabled. 2. PC communication port(s) unavailable or
If a probe alarm is configured to ON, then the associated misassigned.
alarm is always enabled. 3. Chart Recorder Fuse (FCR) blown .
If the probes are configured to AUTO, they act as a a. DataReader
group. This function is designed to assist users who
keep their DataCORDER configured for USDA The Carrier Transicold Data Reader (see Figure 3- 6) is
recording, but do not install the probes for every trip. If all a simple to operate hand held device designed to extract
the probes are disconnected, no alarms are activated. data from the DataCORDER and then upload it to a
As soon as one of the probes is installed , then all of the personal computer. The Data Reader has the ability to
alarms are enabled and the remaining probes that are store multiple data files. Refer to Data Retrieval manual
not installed will give active alarm indications. 62-02575 for a more detailed explanation of the
DataReader
3.6.8 DataCORDER Power-Up
The DataCORDER may be powered up in any one of
four ways:
1. Normal AC power: The DataCORDER is powered
up when the unit is turned on via the stop-start switch.
2. Controller DC battery pack power: If a battery pack DataReader
is installed, the DataCORDER will power up for
communication when an interrogation cable is plugged
into an interrogation receptacle.
3. External DC battery pack power: A 12 volt battery
pack may also be plugged into the back of the
interrogation cable, which is then plugged into an
interrogation port. No controller battery pack is required
with this method.
4. Real Time Clock demand: If the DataCORDER is
equipped with a charged battery pack and AC power is
not present, the DataCORDER will power up when the
real time clock indicates that a data recording should Figure 3- 6 Data Reader
take place. When the DataCORDER is finished
recording, it will power down. b. DataView
During DataCORDER power-up, while using
battery-pack power, the controller will perform a The DataView software for a personal computer is
hardware voltage check on the battery. If the hardware supplied on a floppy disk. This software allows
check passes, the Controller will energize and perform a interrogation, configuration variable assignment,
software battery voltage check before DataCORDER screen view of the data, hard copy report generation,
logging. If either test fails, the real time clock battery cold treatment probe calibration, cold treatment
power-up will be disabled until the next AC power cycle. initialization and file management. Refer to Data
Further DataCORDER temperature logging will be Retrieval manual 62-02575 for a more detailed
prohibited until that time. explanation of the DataView interrogation software.
T-320 3-10
c. Communications Interface Module 3.6.12 USDA Cold Treatment Procedure
The communications interface module is a slave The following is a summary of the steps required to
module which allows communication with a master initiate a USDA Cold Treatment.
central monitoring station. The module will respond to a. Calibrate the three USDA probes by ice bathing the
communication and return information over the main probes and performing the calibration function with
power line. the DataReader, DataView or DataLine. This calibra-
With a remote monitoring unit installed, all functions and tion procedure determines the probe offsets and
selectable features that are accessible at the unit may stores them in the controller for use in generating the
be performed at the master station. Retrieval of all cold treatment report. Refer to the Data Retrieval
DataCORDER reports may also be performed. Refer to manual 62-02575 for more details.
the master system technical manual for further b. Pre-cool the container to the treatment temperature
information. or below.
d. DataLine c.. Install the DataCORDER module battery
pack (if not already installed).
The DataLINE software for a personal computer is
supplied on both floppy disks and CD. This software d. Place the three probes. The probes are placed into
allows interrogation, configuration variable assignment, the pulp of the product (at the locations defined in the
screen view of the data, hard copy report generation, following table) as the product is loaded.
cold treatment probe calibration and file management.
Refer to Data Retrieval manual 62-10629 for a more Sensor 1 Place in pulp of the product located next
detailed explanation of the DataLINE interrogation to the return air intake.
software. The DataLine manual may be found on the net Place in pulp of the product five feet
at www.contaner.carrier.com from the end of the load for 40 foot con-
3.6.11 USDA Cold Treatment Sensor 2 tainers, or three feet from the end of the
load for 20 foot containers. This probe
Sustained cold temperature has been employed as an should be placed in a center carton at
effective postharvest method for the control of one-half the height of the load.
Mediterranean and certain other tropical fruit flies. Place in pulp of product five feet from
Exposing infested fruit to temperatures of 2.2 degrees the end of the load for 40 foot containers
Celsius (36_F) or below for specific periods results in or three feet from the end of the load for
the mortality of the various stages of this group of Sensor 3 20 foot containers. This probe should be
insects. placed in a carton at a side wall at one-
In response to the demand to replace fumigation with half the height of the load.
this environmentally sound process, Carrier has e. To initiate USDA Recording, connect the personal
integrated Cold Treatment capability into its computer and perform the configuration as follows,
microprocessor system. These units have the ability to using either the Data View or Data Line software:
maintain supply air temperature within one-quarter
degree Celsius of setpoint and record minute changes 1. Enter ISO header information
in product temperature within the DataCORDER 2. Enter a trip comment if desired
memory, thus meeting USDA criteria. Information on
USDA is provided in the following subparagraphs 3. Configure the DataCORDER for five probes (s, r, P1,
P2, P3) (dcf02=5)
a. USDA Recording
4. Configure the logging interval for one hour.
A special type of recording is used for USDA cold
treatment purposes. Cold treatment recording requires 5. Set the sensor configuration to “USDA”.
three remote temperature probes be placed at 6. Configure for two byte memory storage format
prescribed locations in the cargo. Provision is made to (dcf04=LONG).
connect these probes to the DataCORDER via 7. Perform a “trip start”
receptacles located at the rear left-hand side of the unit.
Four or five receptacles are provided. The four three-pin 3.6.13 DataCORDER Alarms
receptacles are for the probes. The five pin receptacle is The alarm display is an independent DataCORDER
the rear connection for the Interrogator. The probe function. If an operating parameter is outside of the
receptacles are sized to accept plugs with tricam expected range or a component does not return the
coupling locking devices. A label on the back panel of correct values back to the DataCORDER an alarm is
the unit shows which receptacle is used for each probe. generated. The DataCORDER contains a buffer of up to
The standard DataCORDER report displays the supply eight alarms. A listing of the DataCORDER alarms is
and return air temperatures. The cold treatment report provided in Table 3-10, page 3-26. Refer to paragraph
displays USDA #1, #2, #3 and the supply and return air 3.6.7 for configuration information.
temperatures. Cold treatment recording is backed up by To display alarm codes:
a battery so recording can continue if AC power is lost.
a. While in the Default Display mode, press the ALT.
b. USDA/ Message Trip Comment MODE & ALARM LIST keys. This accesses the Data-
A special feature is incorporated in DataLine/DataView CORDER Alarm List Display Mode, which displays
which allows the user to enter a USDA (or other) any alarms stored in the Alarm Queue.
message in the header of a data report. The maximum b. To scroll to the end of the alarm list press the UP AR-
message length is 78 characters. Only one message will ROW. Depressing the DOWN ARROW key will scroll
be recorded per day. the list backward.
3-11 T-320
c. The left display will show “AL#” where # is the alarms 3.6.14 ISO Trip Header
number in the queue. The right display will show DataLine provides the user with an interface to
“AA##,” if the alarm is active, where ## is the alarm view/modify current settings of the ISO trip header
number. “IA##,” will show if the alarm is inactive through the ISO Trip Header screen.
The ISO Trip Header screen is displayed when the user
d. “END” is displayed to indicate the end of the alarm list clicks on the “ISO Trip Header” button in the “Trip
if any alarms are active. “CLEAr” is displayed if all the Functions” Group Box on the System Tools screen.
alarms in the list are inactive.
F9 function -- Provides the user with a shortcut for
manually triggering the refresh operation.Before
e. If no alarms are active, the Alarm Queue may be sending modified parameter values, the user must
cleared. The exception to this rule is the DataCORD- ensure that a successful connection is established with
ER Alarm Queue Full alarm (AL91) , which does not the Controller.
have to be inactive in order to clear the alarm list. To
Clear the Alarm List: If the connection is established with the DataCorder, the
current contents of the ISO Trip Header from the
DataCorder will be displayed in each field. If the
1. Press the ALT. MODE & ALARM LIST keys. connection is not established with the DataCorder, all
fields on the screen will be displayed as “X’s”.If at any
2. Press the UP/DOWN ARROW key until “CLEAr” is time during the display of the ISO Trip Header screen
displayed. the connection is not established or is lost, the user is
alerted to the status of the connection.
3. Press the ENTER key. The alarm list will clear and After modifying the values and ensuring a successful
“-- -- -- -- -- ” will be displayed. connection has been made with the DataCorder, click
on the “Send” button to send the modified parameter
4. Press the ALARM LIST key. “AL” will show on the left values.
display and “-- -- -- -- -- ” on the right display when The maximum allowed length of the ISO Trip Header is
there are no alarms in the list. 128 characters.If the user tries to refresh the screen or
close the utility without sending the changes made on
5. Upon clearing of the Alarm Queue, the Alarm light will the screen to the DataCorder, the user is alerted with a
be turned off. message.
Table 3-4 Controller Configuration Variables
NOTES
1. Configuration numbers not listed are not used in this application. These items may appear when loading
configuration software to the controller but changes will not be recognized by the controller programming.
CONFIGURATION TITLE DEFAULT OPTION

NUMBER
CnF02 Evaporator Fan Speed dS (Dual) SS (Single)
CnF04 Dehumidification Mode On OFF
CnF11 Defrost “Off” Selection noOFF OFF
CnF16 DataCORDER Present On (Yes) OFF (No)
CnF22 Economy Mode Option OFF Std, Full
CnF23 Defrost Interval Timer Save Option noSAv SAv
CnF24 Advanced Pre--Trip Enhanced Test Series Auto Auto2, Auto3
CnF25 Pre-Trip Test Points/Results Recording Option rSLtS dAtA
CnF26 Heat Lockout Change Option Set to --10_C Set to --5_C
CnF28 Bulb Mode Option NOr bULb
CnF31 Probe Check Option Std SPEC
CnF33 Snap Freeze Option OFF SnAP
CnF34 Degree Celsius/Fahrenheit Lockout Option bOth _C,_F
CnF37 Electronic Temperature Recorder rEtUR (Return) suPPl, BOth
CnF47 Fresh Air Vent Position Sensor OFF UPP, LOW
CnF51 Timed Defrost Disable 0 0--out, 1--in
T-320 3-12
Table 3-5 Controller Function Codes
(Sheet 1 of 3)
Code TITLE DESCRIPTION

No.
Note: If the function is not applicable, the display will read “-- -- -- -- -- ”
Display Only Functions
Displays the SMV percent open. The right display reads 100% when the valve is
Cd01 Suction Modulation fully open. The valve will usually be at 10% on start up of the unit except in very
Valve Opening (%) high ambient temperatures.
Cd02 Not Applicable Not used
The current sensor measures current draw in lines L1 & L2 by all of the high volt-
Cd03 Compressor Motor age components. It also measures current draw in compressor motor leg T3. The
Current compressor leg T3 current is displayed.
Cd04 Line Current, The current sensor measures current on two legs. The third unmeasured leg is
Phase A calculated based on a current algorithm. The current measured is used for control
and diagnostic purposes. For control processing, the highest of the Phase A and
Cd05 Line Current, B current values is used for current limiting purposes. For diagnostic processing,
Phase B the current draws are used to monitor component energization. Whenever a heat-
er or a motor is turned ON or OFF, the current draw increase/reduction for that
Cd06 Line Current, activity is measured. The current draw is then tested to determine if it falls within
Phase C the expected range of values for the component. Failure of this test will result in a
pre-trip failure or a control alarm indication.
Cd07 Main Power Voltage The main supply voltage is displayed.
Cd08 Main Power Fre- The value of the main power frequency is displayed in Hertz. The frequency dis-
quency played will be halved if either fuse F1 or F2 is bad (alarm code AL21).
Cd09 Ambient Tempera- The ambient sensor reading is displayed.
ture
Cd10 Compressor Suction Compressor suction temperature sensor reading is displayed.
Temperature
Cd11 Compressor Dis- Compressor discharge temperature sensor reading is displayed.
charge Temperature
Cd12 Compressor Suction Compressor suction pressure transducer reading is displayed.
Pressure
Cd14 Compressor Dis- Compressor discharge pressure transducer reading is displayed.
charge Pressure
Cd15 Unloader Valve The status of the valve is displayed (Open - Closed).
Cd16 Compressor
Hour Meter
Motor Records total hours of compressor run time. Total hours are recorded in incre-
ments of 10 hours (i.e., 3000 hours is displayed as 300).
Cd17 Relative Humidity Humidity sensor reading is displayed. This code displays the relative humidity, as
(%) a percent value.
Cd18 Software Revision # The software revision number is displayed.
This code checks the Controller/DataCORDER battery pack. While the test is run-
ning, “btest” will flash on the right display, followed by the result. “PASS” will be
displayed for battery voltages greater than 7.0 volts. “FAIL” will be displayed for
Cd19 Battery Check battery voltages between 4.5 and 7.0 volts, and “-- -- -- -- -- ” will be displayed for
battery voltages less than 4.5 volts. After the result is displayed for four seconds,
“btest” will again be displayed, and the user may continue to scroll through the
various codes.
Cd20 Config/Model # This code indicates the dash number of the model for which the Controller is con-
figured (i.e., if the unit is a 69NT40-551-100, the display will show “51100”).
Cd21 Economizer Valve The status of the valve is displayed (Open - Closed).
Cd22 Compressor State The status of the compressor is displayed (Off, On).
Cd23 Evaporator Fan Displays the current evaporator fan state (high, low or off).
Cd24 Controlled Not used in this application
Atmosphere State
3-13 T-320
Table 3-5 Controller Function Codes (Sheet 2 of 3)
Compressor Run This code displays the time remaining until the unit goes into defrost (in tenths of
Cd25 Time Remaining Un- an hour). This value is based on the actual accumulated compressor running
til Defrost time.
Cd26 Defrost Temperature Defrost temperature sensor reading is displayed.
Sensor Reading
Configurable Functions
NOTE
Function codes Cd27 through Cd37 are user-selectable functions. The operator can change the value of
these functions to meet the operational needs of the container.
There are two modes for defrost initiation, either user--selected timed intervals or
automatic control. The user--selected values are (OFF), 3, 6, 9, 12, or 24 hours
while the factory default is 12 hours. Automatic defrost starts with an initial de-
frost at 3 hours and then adjusts the interval to the next defrost based on the ac-
cumulation of ice on the evaporator coil. Following a start--up or after termination
of a defrost, the time will not begin counting down until the defrost temperature
sensor (DTS) reading falls below set point. If the reading of DTS rises above set
point any time during the timer count down, the interval is reset and the count-
down begins over. If DTS fails, alarm code AL60 is activated and control switches
Cd27 Defrost Interval over to the the return temperature sensor. The controller will act in the same man-
(Hours or Automatic) ner as with the DTS except the return temperature sensor reading will be used.
Defrost Interval Timer Value (Configuration variable CnF23): If the software is
configured to “SAv” (save) for this option, then the value of the defrost interval
timer will be saved at power down and restored at power up. This option prevents
short power interruptions from resetting an almost expired defrost interval, and
possibly delaying a needed defrost cycle.
NOTE
The defrost interval timer counts only during compressor run time.
This code determines the temperature units (_C or _F) which will be used for all
temperature displays. The user selects _C or _F by selecting function code Cd28
and pushing the ENTER key. The factory default value is Celsius units.
Cd28 Temperature Units
(_C or _F) NOTE
This function code will display “--- --- --- --- ---“ if Configuration Variable CnF34 is
set to _F.
If all of the control sensors are out of range (alarm code AL26) or there is a probe
circuit calibration failure (alarm code AL27), the unit will enter the shutdown state
defined by this setting. The user selects one of four possible actions as follows:
A -- Full Cooling (Compressor is on, economized operation. SMV subject to pressure
and current limit.)
Cd29 Failure Action B -- Partial Cooling (Compressor is on, standard operation. SMV subject to pressure
(Mode)
and current limit.)
C -- Evaporator Fan Only (Evaporator fans on high speed, not applicable with frozen
set points.
D -- Full System Shutdown -- Factory Default (Shut down every component in the
unit)
The in-range tolerance will determine the band of temperatures around the set
point which will be designated as in-range. If the control temperature is in-range,
the in-range light will be illuminated. There are four possible values:
Cd30 In-Range Tolerance 1 = ¦ 0.5_C (¦ 0.9_F)
2 = ¦ 1.0_C (¦ 1.8_F)
3 = ¦ 1.5_C (¦ 2.7_F)
4 = ¦ 2.0_C (¦ 3.6_F) -- Factory Default
The stagger start offset time is the amount of time that the unit will delay at start-
Cd31 Stagger Start Offset up, thus allowing multiple units to stagger their control initiation when all units are
Time (Seconds) powered up together. The eight possible offset values are:
0 (Factory Default), 3, 6, 9, 12, 15, 18 or 21 seconds
T-320 3-14
Table 3-5 Controller Function Codes (Sheet 3 of 3)
The current limit is the maximum current draw allowed on any phase at any time.
Limiting the unit’s current reduces the load on the main power supply. This is ac-
Current Limit complished by reducing the SMV position until current draw is reduced to the set
Cd32 (Amperes) point. When desirable, the limit can be lowered. Note, however, that capacity is
also reduced. The five values for 460vac operation are:
15, 17, 19, 21 (Factory Default), 23
Relative humidity set point is available only on units configured for dehumidifica-
tion. When the mode is activated, the control probe LED flashes on and off every
second to alert the user. If not configured, the mode is permanently deactivated
Perishable Mode and “-- -- -- -- -- ” will display. The value can be set to “OFF.” “TEST,” or a range of
Cd33 Dehumidification 65 to 95% relative humidity in increments of 1%. [If bulb mode is active (code
Control (% RH) Cd35) and “Lo” speed evaporator motors are selected (code Cd36) then set point
ranges from 60 to 95%.] When “TEST” is selected or test set point is entered, the
heat LED should illuminate, indicating that dehumidification mode is activated.
After a period of five minutes in the “TEST” mode has elapsed, the previously
selected mode is reinstated.
Cd34 Economy Mode Economy mode is a user selectable mode of operation provided for power saving
(On--Off) purposes.
Bulb mode is a user selectable mode of operation that is an extension of dehu-
midification control (Cd33). If dehumidification is set to “Off,” code Cd35 will dis-
Cd35 Bulb Mode play “Nor” and the user will be unable to change it. After a dehumidification set
point has been selected and entered for code Cd33, the user may then change
code Cd35 to “bulb.” After bulb has been selected and entered, the user may then
utilize function codes Cd36 and Cd37 to make the desired changes.
This code is enabled only if in the dehumidification mode (code Cd33) and bulb
mode (Cd35) has been set to “bulb”. If these conditions are not met, “alt” will be
displayed (indicating that the evaporator fans will alternate their speed) and the
Evaporator Speed display cannot be changed. If a dehumidification set point has been selected
Cd36 along with bulb mode then “alt” may be selected for alternating speed, “Lo” for low
Select
speed evaporator fan only, or “Hi” for high speed evaporator fan only. If a setting
other than “alt” has been selected and bulb mode is deactivated in any manner,
then selection reverts back to “alt.”
This code, as with function code Cd36, is used in conjunction with bulb mode and
dehumidification. If bulb mode is active, this code allows the user to change the
Defrost Termination temperature above which defrost will terminate. It allows the user to change the
Cd37 Temperature Setting setting within a range of 4_C to 25.6_C in 0.1_C (0.2_F) increments. This value is
(Bulb Mode) changed using the UP/DOWN ARROW keys, followed by the ENTER key when
the desired value is displayed. If bulb mode is deactivated, the DTS setting re-
turns to the default.
Display Only Functions -- Continued
Code Cd38 will display the current secondary supply temperature sensor reading
Cd38 Secondary Supply for units configured for four probes. If the unit is configured with a DataCORDER,
Temperature Sensor Cd38 will display “-- -- -- -- -- .” If the DataCORDER suffers a failure, (AL55) Cd38
will display the supply recorder sensor reading.
Code Cd39 will display the current secondary return temperature sensor reading
for units configured for four probes. If the unit is configured with a DataCORDER,
Cd39 Secondary Return Cd39 will display “-- -- -- -- -- .” If the DataCORDER suffers a failure, (AL55) Cd39
Temperature Sensor
will display the return recorder sensor reading.
Code Cd40 is configured at commissioning to read a valid container identification
Cd40 Container Identifica- number. The reading will not display alpha characters, only the numeric portion of
tion Number the number will display.
SERVICE FUNCTION: This code is used for troubleshooting and allows manual
Cd41 Valve Override positioning of the economizer, unloader, suction modulation and oil return valves.
Refer to paragraph 6.17 for operating instructions.
Cd42 Oil Return Valve The status of the valve is displayed (Open - Closed).
The fresh air flow (CMH/CFM) is displayed. Unless AL50 is active or CnF47 is
Cd45 Fresh Air Vent OFF. This function code will automatically activate for 30 seconds and display
Position Sensor when a vent position change occurs.
Cd46
Cd48
Cd49 Days Since Last Code Cd49 will display the time period (days) since the last successful pre--trip.
Successful Pre--trip
3-15 T-320
Table 3-6 Controller Alarm Indications
(Sheet 1 of 4)
No.
Alarm 14 is triggered if the electronic phase detection system is unable to deter-
mine the correct phase relationship. DIRCHECK will be displayed while the rela-
tionship is determined. If the system is unable to determine the proper relation-
AL14 Phase Sequence
Failure -- Electronic ship alarm 14 will remain active. Additional information on phase detection may
be displayed at Function Code Cd41. If the right most digit of Code Cd41 is 3 or
4, this indicates incorrect motor or sensor wiring. If the right most digit is 5, this
indicates a failed current sensor assembly.
Alarm 15 is activated when SMV is greater than 15%, unit is in economized or
standard operating modes and Return -- Supply Temperature Difference is less
AL15 Loss of Cool than 0.5C after 4 minutes of compressor run time. The alarm triggers failure ac-
tion C ( evaporator fan only) or D ( all machinery off ) if in perishable mode and
failure action D ( all machinery off ) if a frozen set point has been selected.. The
alarm remains active until the unit is power cycled.
Alarm 16 is triggered if compressor current draw is 15% over calculated maxi-
AL16 Compressor Current mum for 10 minutes out of the last hour. The alarm is display only and will trigger
High off when the compressor operates for one hour without over current.
Alarm 17 is triggered if a compressor start in both directions fails to generate suf-
ficient pressure differential. The controller will attempt restart every twenty min-
AL17 Phase Sequence utes and deactivate the alarm if successful. This alarm triggers failure action C
Failure -- Pressure (evaporator fan only) or D (all machinery off) of Function Code Cd29 if the unit
has a perishable set point. Failure action D (all machinery off) is triggered if the
unit has a frozen set point
Alarm 18 is triggered if discharge pressure is 10% over calculated maximum for
AL18 Discharge Pressure 10 minutes within the last hour. The alarm is display only and will trigger off when
High the compressor operates for one hour without overpressure.
Alarm 19 is triggered if discharge temperature exceeds 135_C (275_F) for 10
AL19 Discharge Tempera- minutes within the last hour. The alarm is display only and will trigger off when
ture High the compressor operates for one hour without over temperature.
Alarm 20 is triggered by control power fuse (F3A, F3B) opening and will cause
AL20 Control Circuit Fuse the software shutdown of all control units. This alarm will remain active until the
Open (24 vac) fuse is replaced.
Alarm 21 is triggered by one of the fuses (F1/F2) being opened on 18 volts AC
AL21 Micro Circuit Fuse power supply to the Controller. The suction modulation valve (SMV) will be
Open (18 vac) opened and current limiting is halted. Temperature control will be maintained by
cycling the compressor.
Alarm 22 responds to the evaporator motor internal protectors. The alarm is trig-
AL22 Evaporator Fan Mo- gered by opening of either internal protector. It will disable all control units until
tor Safety the motor protector resets and the unit is power cycled.
Alarm 23 is triggered if low current draw is detected on phase B and IPCP, HPS
or IPEM is not tripped. If the compressor should be running, the controller will
initiate a start up every five minutes and trigger off, if current reappears. If the
AL23 Loss of Phase B evaporator fan motors only should be running, the alarm will trigger off is current
reappears. This alarm triggers failure action C (evaporator fan only) or D (all ma-
chinery off) of Function Code Cd29 if the unit has a perishable set point. Failure
action D (all machinery off) is triggered if the unit has a frozen set point
Alarm 24 is triggered when compressor is not drawing any current. It also triggers
failure action ”C” or ”D” set by function Code 29 for perishable setpoint, or ”D” for
AL24 Compressor Motor frozen setpoint. If the compressor should be running, the controller will initiate a
Safety
start up every five minutes and trigger off, if current reappears. This alarm will
remain active until compressor draws current.
T-320 3-16
Table 3-6 Controller Alarm Indications (Sheet 2 of 4)
Alarm 25 is triggered by the opening of the condenser motor internal protector
and will disable all control units except for the evaporator fans. This alarm will
AL25 Condenser Fan Mo- remain active until the motor protector resets. This alarm triggers failure action C
tor Safety (evaporator fan only) or D (all machinery off) of Function Code Cd29 if the unit
has a perishable set point. Failure action D (all machinery off) is triggered if the
unit has a frozen set point
All Supply and Re- Alarm 26 is triggered if the Controller determines that all of the control sensors
AL26 turn temperature are out-of-range. This can occur for box temperatures outside the range of
Control Sensors --50_C to +70_C (--58_F to +158_F). This alarm triggers the failure action code
Failure set by Function Code Cd29.
The Controller has a built-in Analog to Digital (A-D) converter, used to convert
A/D Accuracy Fail- analog readings (i.e. temperature sensors, current sensors, etc.) to digital read-
AL27 ings. The Controller continuously performs calibration tests on the A-D converter.
ure
If the A-D converter fails to calibrate for 30 consecutive seconds, this alarm is
activated.This alarm will be inactivated as soon as the A-D converter calibrates.
Alarm 28 is triggered if suction pressure is below 2 psia and alarm 66 (Suction
Pressure Transducer Failure) is not active. This alarm will be inactivated when
AL28 Low Suction Pres- suction pressure rises above 2 psia for three continuous minutes. This alarm
sure triggers failure action C (evaporator fan only) or D (all machinery off) as deter-
mined by User Selectable Failure Response if the unit has a perishable set point;
Failure action D (all machinery off) if the unit has a frozen set point. Reset SMV.
Alarm 50 is activated whenever the sensor is outside the valid range. There is a
5 minute adjustment period where the user can change the vent position without
AL50 Fresh Air Position generating an alarm event. The sensor requires 5 minutes of no movement to
Sensor (VPS) confirm stability. If the vent position changes at any point beyond the 5 minute
adjustment period, the sensor will generate an alarm event. The alarm is trig-
gered off when the unit power cycles and the sensor is within valid range.
During start-up diagnostics, the EEPROM is examined to determine validity of its
contents. This is done by testing the set point and the alarm list. If the contents
are invalid, Alarm 51 is activated. During control processing, any operation in-
volving alarm list activity that results in an error will cause Alarm 51 to be acti-
AL51 Alarm List Failure vated. Alarm 51 is a “display only” alarm and is not written into the alarm list.
Pressing the ENTER key when “CLEAr” is displayed will result in an attempt to
clear the alarm list. If that action is successful (all alarms are inactive), Alarm 51
will be reset.
Alarm 52 is activated whenever the alarm list is determined to be full; at start-up
AL52 Alarm List Full or after recording an alarm in the list. Alarm 52 is displayed, but is not recorded in
the alarm list. This alarm can be reset by clearing the alarm list. This can be done
only if all alarms written in the list are inactive.
Alarm 53 is caused by the battery pack charge being too low to provide sufficient
AL53 Battery Pack Failure power for battery-backed recording. If this alarm occurs on start up, allow a unit
fitted with rechargeable batteries to operate for up to 24 hours to charge re-
chargeable batteries sufficiently to deactivate the alarm
Alarm 54 is activated by an invalid primary supply temperature sensor reading
that is sensed outside the range of --50 to +70_C (--58_F to +158_F) or if the
probe check logic has determined there is a fault with this sensor. If Alarm 54 is
activated and the primary supply is the control sensor, the secondary supply sen-
Primary Supply Tem- sor will be used for control if the unit is so equipped. If the unit does not have a
AL54 perature Sensor secondary supply temperature sensor, and AL54 is activated, the primary return
Failure (STS) sensor reading, minus 2_C will be used for control.
NOTE
The P5 Pre-Trip test must be run to inactivate the alarm
AL55 I/O Failure This alarm activates to indicate I/O functions have failed and required replace-
ment.
3-17 T-320
Alarm 56 is activated by an invalid primary return temperature sensor reading
that is outside the range of --50 to +70_C (--58_F to +158_F). If Alarm 56 is acti-
vated and the primary return is the control sensor, the secondary return sensor
Primary Return Tem- will be used for control if the unit is so equipped. If the unit is not equipped with a
AL56 perature Sensor secondary return temperature sensor or it fails, the primary supply sensor will be
Failure (RTS) used for control.
NOTE
The P5 Pre-Trip test must be run to inactivate the alarm.
AL57 Ambient Tempera- Alarm 57 is triggered by an ambient temperature reading outside the valid range
ture Sensor Failure from --50_C (--58_F) to +70_C (+158_F).
Alarm 58 is triggered when the compressor high discharge pressure safety switch
AL58 Compressor High remains open for at least one minute. This alarm will remain active until the pres-
Pressure Safety sure switch resets, at which time the compressor will restart.
Alarm 60 is an indication of a probable failure of the defrost temperature sensor
(DTS). It is triggered by the opening of the heat termination thermostat (HTT) or
the failure of the DTS to go above set point within two hours of defrost initiation.
Defrost Temperature After one-half hour with a frozen range set point, or one-half hour of continuous
AL60 compressor run time, if the return air falls below 7_C (45_F), the Controller
Sensor Failure
checks to ensure the DTS reading has dropped to 10_C or below. If not, a DTS
failure alarm is given and the defrost mode is operated using the return tempera-
ture sensor. The defrost mode will be terminated after one hour by the Controller.
Alarm 61 is triggered by detection of improper amperage resulting from heater
AL61 Heaters Failure activation or deactivation. Each phase of the power source is checked for proper
amperage.This alarm is a display alarm with no resulting failure action, and will
be reset by a proper amp draw of the heater.
Alarm 62 is triggered by improper current draw increase (or decrease) resulting
from compressor turn on (or off). The compressor is expected to draw a mini-
AL62 Compressor Circuit mum of 2 amps; failure to do so will activate the alarm. This is a display alarm
Failure
with no associated failure action and will be reset by a proper amp draw of the
compressor.
Alarm 63 is triggered by the current limiting system. If the compressor is ON and
current limiting procedures cannot maintain a current level below the user se-
AL63 Current Over Limit lected limit, the current limit alarm is activated. This alarm is a display alarm and
is inactivated by power cycling the unit, changing the current limit via the code
select Cd32, or if the current decreases below the activation level.
Alarm 64 is triggered if the discharge temperature sensed is outside the range of
AL64 Discharge Tempera- --60_C (--76_F) to 175_C (347_F), or if the sensor is out of range. This is a dis-
ture Over Limit play alarm and has no associated failure action.
AL65 Discharge Pressure Alarm 65 is triggered if a compressor discharge transducer is out of range. This
Transducer Failure is a display alarm and has no associated failure action.
Suction Pressure
AL66 Transducer Failure Alarm 66 is triggered if a suction pressure transducer is out of range. This is a
display alarm and has no associated failure action.
Alarm 67 is triggered by a humidity sensor reading outside the valid range of 0%
AL67 Humidity Sensor to 100% relative humidity. If alarm AL67 is triggered when the dehumidification
Failure mode is activated, then the dehumidification mode will be deactivated.
T-320 3-18
NOTE
If the Controller is configured for four probes without a DataCORDER, the DataCORDER alarms AL70 and
AL71 will be processed as Controller alarms AL70 and AL71. Refer to Table 3-10, page 3-26.
The Controller performs self-check routines. if an internal failure occurs, an
“ERR” alarm will appear on the display. This is an indication the Controller needs
to be replaced.
ERROR DESCRIPTION
ERR 0 -- RAM failure Indicates that the Controller working memory has
failed.
EER 1 -- Program Memory Indicates a problem with the Controller program.
failure
EER 2 -- Watchdog The Controller program has entered a mode where-
time--out by the Controller program has stopped executing.
EER 3 -- N/A N/A
EER 4 -- N/A N/A
EER 5 -- A-D failure The Controller’s Analog to Digital (A-D) converter
has failed.
I
Internall
ERR Microprocessor EER 6 -- IO Board failure Internal program/update failure.
# EER 7 -- Controller failure Internal version/firmware incompatable.
Failure
EER 8--DataCorder failure Internal DataCorder memory failure.
EER -- 9 Controller failure Internal controller memory failure.
In the event that a failure occurs and the display cannot be updated, the status
LED will indicate the appropriate EER code using Morse code as shown below.
E R R 0 to 9
ERR0 = . .--. .--. ----------
ERR1 = . .--. .--. . --------
ERR2 = . .--. .--. . . ------
ERR3 = . .--. .--. . . . ----
ERR4 = . .--. .--. . . . . --
ERR5 = . .--. .--. -- . . . .
ERR6 = . .--. .--. ---- . . .
ERR7 = . .--. .--. ------ . .
ERR8 = . .--. .--. -------- .
ERR9 = . .--. .--. -------- .
Enter Setpoint
Entr (Press Arrow & The Controller is prompting the operator to enter a set point.
StPt Enter)
Low Main Voltage
(Function Codes This message will be alternately displayed with the set point whenever the supply
LO Cd27--38 disabled
voltage is less than 75% of its proper value.
and NO alarm
stored.)
3-19 T-320
Table 3-7 Controller Pre-Trip Test Codes
(Sheet 1 of 4)
No.
NOTE
“Auto” or “Auto1” menu includes the: P0, P1, P2, P3, P4, P5, P6 and rSLts. “Auto2” menu in-
cludes P0, P1, P2, P3, P4, P5, P6, P7, P8, P9, P10 and rSLts.
All lights and display segments will be energized for five seconds at the start of
P0--0 Pre-Trip Initiated the pre-trip. Since the unit cannot recognize lights and display failures, there are
no test codes or results associated with this phase of pre-trip.
Setup: Heater must start in the OFF condition, and then be turned on. A current
P1-0 Heaters Turned On draw test is done after 15 seconds.
Pass/Fail Criteria: Passes if current draw change is within the range specified.
Setup: Heater must start in the ON condition, and then be turned off. A current
P1-1 Heaters Turned Off draw test is done after 10 seconds.
Requirements: Water pressure switch or condenser fan switch input must be
closed.
P2-0 Condenser Fan On Setup: Condenser fan is turned ON, a current draw test is done after 15 sec-
onds.
Setup: Condenser fan is turned OFF, a current draw test is done after 10 sec-
P2-1 Condenser Fan Off onds.
P3 Low Speed Evapo- Requirements: The unit must be equipped with a low speed evaporator fan, as
rator Fans determined by the Evaporator Fan speed select configuration variable.
Setup: The high speed evaporator fans will be turned on for 10 seconds, then off
for two seconds, then the low speed evaporator fans are turned on. A current
P3-0 Low Speed Evapo- draw test is done after 60 seconds.
rator Fan Motors On Pass/Fail Criteria: Passes if change in current draw is within the range speci-
fied. Fails if AL11 or AL12 activates during test for units operating with single fan
only.
Setup: The low speed Evaporator Fan is turned off, a current draw test is done
P3-1 Low Speed Evapo- after 10 seconds.
rator Fan Motors Off Pass/Fail Criteria: Passes if change in current draw is within the range speci-
only.
Setup: The high speed Evaporator Fan is turned on, a current draw test is done
P4-0 High Speed Evapo- after 60 seconds.
rator Fan Motors On Pass/Fail Criteria: Passes if change in current draw is within the range speci-
only.
Setup: The high speed Evaporator Fan is turned off, a current draw test is done
P4-1 High Speed Evapo- after 10 seconds.
rator Fan Motors Off Pass/Fail Criteria: Passes if change in current draw is within the range speci-
fied. Fails if AL11 or AL12 activates during test.
Setup: The High Speed Evaporator Fan is turned on and run for eight minutes,
with all other outputs de-energized.
Pass/Fail Criteria: A temperature comparison is made between the return and
supply probes.
P5-0 Supply/Return Probe
Test NOTE
If this test fails, “P5-0” and “FAIL” will be displayed. If both Probe tests (this
test and the PRIMARY/ SECONDARY) pass, the display will read “P5”
“PASS.”
T-320 3-20
Table 3-7 Controller Pre-Trip Test Codes
(Sheet 2 of 4)
Requirements: For units equipped with secondary supply probe only.
Pass/Fail Criteria: The temperature difference between primary and secondary
probe (supply) is compared.
P5-1 Supply Probe Test NOTE
If this test fails, “P5-1” and FAIL will be displayed. If both Probe tests (this
and the SUPPLY/ RETURN TEST) pass, because of the multiple tests, the
display will read ’P 5’ ’PASS’.
Requirements: For units equipped with secondary return probe only.
Pass/Fail Criteria: The temperature difference between primary and secondary
probe (return) is compared.
NOTES
P5-2 Return Probe Test 1. If this test fails, “P5-2” and “FAIL” will be displayed. If both Probe tests
(this test and the SUPPLY/ RETURN) pass, because of the multiple
tests, the display will read “P 5,” “PASS.”
2. The results of Pre-Trip tests 5-0, 5-1 and 5-2 will be used to activate or
clear control probe alarms.
Setup: The system is operated through a sequence of events to test the compo-
Refrigerant Probes, nents. The sequence is: Step 1, de--energize all outputs; Step 2, start unit with
Compressor unloader valve open. Open then close the suction modulation valve. Monitor suc-
P6 tion pressure; Step 3, open suction modulation valve to a known position; Step 4,
and
Refrigeration valves close suction modulation valve to a know position; Step 5, open economizer
valve; Step 6, close unloader valve; Step 7, open unloader valve; Step 8, close
economizer valve; Step 9, de--energize all outputs.
P6-0 Discharge If alarm 64 is activated any time during the first 45 second period of Step 1, the
Thermistor Test test fails.
Alarm is activated if suction temperature is outside of the valid range of --60_C
P6-1 Suction (--76_F) to 150_C (302_F) any time during the first 45 second period of Step 1,
Thermistor Test the test fails.
P6-2 Discharge Pressure If alarm 65 is activated any time during the first 45 second period of Step 1, the
Sensor Test test fails.
P6-3 Suction Pressure If alarm 66 is activated any time during the first 45 second period of Step 1, the
Sensor Test test fails.
P6-4 Compressor Current Compressor current is tested before and after start up. If current does not in-
Draw Test crease, the test fails.
P6-5 Suction Modulation Suction pressure is measured before and after the valve opens. If suction pres-
Valve Test sure does not increase, the test fails.
P6-6 Economizer Suction pressure is measured during Steps 4 and 5. If suction pressure does not
Valve Test increase, the test fails.
P6-7 Unloader Valve Test Suction pressure is measured during Steps 6 and 7. If suction pressure does not
increase, the test fails.
3-21 T-320
Table 3-7 Temperature Controller Pre-Trip Test Codes
(Sheet 3 of 4)
NOTE
P7--0 & P8 are included with “Auto2 & Auto 3” only. P9--0 through P10 are included with “Auto2” only
NOTE
This test is skipped if the sensed ambient temperature is less than 7_C
(45_F), the return air temperature is less than --17.8_C (0_F), the water
P7-0 Highg Pressure pressure switch is open or the condenser fan switch is open.
S it h Closed
Switch Cl d Setup: With the unit running, the condenser fan is de-energized, and a 15 min-
ute timer is started.
Pass/Fail Criteria: The test fails if high pressure switch fails to open in 15 min-
utes.
Requirements: Test P7-0 must pass for this test to execute. Setup: The con-
P7-1 High Pressure denser fan is started and a 60 second timer is started.
Switch Open Pass/Fail Criteria: Passes the test if the high pressure switch (HPS) closes
within the 60 second time limit, otherwise, it fails.
Setup: If the container temperature is below 15.6°C (60_F), the set point is
changed to 15.6°C, and a 180 minute timer is started. The left display will read
Perishable Mode “P8-0.” The control will then heat the container until 15.6°C is reached. If the
P8-0 container temperature is above 15.6°C at the start of the test, then the test pro-
Heat Test
ceeds immediately to test P8-1 and the left display will change to “P8-1.”
Pass/Fail Criteria: The test fails if the 180 minute timer expires before the con-
trol temperature reaches set point. The display will read “P8-0,” “FAIL.”
Requirements: Control temperature must be at least 15.6°C (60_F).
Setup: The set point is changed to 0°C (32_F), and a 180 minute timer is
Perishable Mode started. The left display will read “P8-1,” the right display will show the supply air
P8-1 temperature. The unit will then start to pull down the temperature to the 0°C set
Pull Down Test
point.
Pass/Fail Criteria: The test passes if the container temperature reaches set
point before the 180 minute timer expires.
Requirements: Test P8-1 must pass for this test to execute. This test is skipped
if the dataCORDER is not configured or available.
Setup: The left display will read “P8-2,” and the right display will show the supply
air temperature. A two hour timer is started. The unit will be required to maintain
the temperature to within + or -- 0.5_C (0.9_F) of set point until a DataCORDER
recording is executed. The recorder supply probe temperature running total (and
Perishable Mode its associated readings counter) will be zeroed out for the remainder of the
P8-2 Maintain Tempera- recording period at the start of this test, so that the actual value recorded in the
ture Test DataCORDER will be an average of only this test’s results. Once a recording
interval is complete, the average recorder supply temperature will be recorded in
the DataCORDER, as well as stored in memory for use in applying the test pass/
fail criteria.
Pass/Fail Criteria: If the recorded temperature is within +/-- 0.5_C. of set point
from test start to DataCORDER recording, the test passes. If the average tem-
perature is outside of the tolerance range at the recording, the test fails and will
auto--repeat by starting P8--0 over.
Setup: The defrost temperature sensor (DTS) reading will be displayed on the
left display. The right display will show the supply air temperature. The unit will
run FULL COOL for 30 minutes maximum until the DTT is considered closed.
Once the DTT is considered closed, the unit simulates defrost by running the
P9-0 Defrost Test heaters for up to two hours, or until the DTT is considered open.
Pass/Fail Criteria: The test fails if: the DTT is not considered closed after the 30
minutes of full cooling, HTT opens when DTT is considered closed or if return air
temperature rises above 49/50_C (120/122_F).
T-320 3-22
Table 3-7 Controller Pre-Trip Test Codes (Sheet 4 of 4)
Setup: If the container temperature is below 7.2_C (45_F), the set point is
changed to 7.2_C and a 180 minute timer is started. The control will then be
placed in the equivalent of normal heating. If the container temperature is above
7.2_C at the start of the test, then the test proceeds immediately to test 10--1.
P10-0 Frozen Mode During this test, the control temperature will be shown in the right display.
Heat Test Pass/Fail Criteria: The test fails if the 180 minute timer expires before the con-
trol temperate reaches set point --0.3_C (0.17_F). If the test fails it will not auto--
repeat. There is no pass display for this test, once the control temperature
reaches set point, the test proceeds to test 10--1
Requirements: Control temperature must be at least 7.2_C (45_F)
Setup: The set point is changed to --17.8_C (0_F). The system will then attempt
Frozen Mode Pull to pull don the Control temperature to set point using normal frozen mode cool-
P10-1 ing. During this test, the control temperate will be shown on the right display
Down Test
Pass/Fail Criteria: If the control temperature does not reach set point --0.3_C
(0.17_F) before the 180 minute timer expires the test fails and will auto--repeat
by starting P10--0 over.
Requirements: Test P10-1 must pass for this test to execute. This test is
skipped if the dataCORDER is not configured or available.
Setup: During this test, the left display will read “P10-2,” and the right display will
show the supply air temperature. A two hour timer is started. The unit will be
required to maintain the temperature to within + 0.5_C (0.9_F)/--1.3_C (2.3_F) of
set point until a DataCORDER recording is executed. The recorder supply probe
temperature running total (and its associated readings counter) will be zeroed
Frozen Mode out for the remainder of the recording period at the start of this test, so that the
P10-2 Maintain actual value recorded in the DataCORDER will be an average of only this test’s
Temperature Test results. Once a recording interval is complete, the average recorder supply tem-
perature will be recorded in the DataCORDER, as well as stored in memory for
use in applying the test pass/fail criteria.
Pass/Fail Criteria: If the recorded temperature is within +0.5_C (0.9_F)/--1.3_C
(2.3_F) of set point from test start to DataCORDER recording, the test passes. If
the average temperature is outside of the tolerance range at the recording, the
test fails and will auto--repeat by starting P10--0 over.
3-23 T-320
Table 3-8 DataCORDER Function Code Assignments
NOTE
Inapplicable Functions Display “-- -- -- -- -- ”
To Access: Press ALT. MODE key
No.
dC1 Recorder Supply Current reading of the supply recorder sensor.
Temperature
dC2 Recorder Return Current reading of the return recorder sensor.
Temperature
dC3-5 USDA 1,2,3 Temper- Current readings of the three USDA probes.
atures
Current values of the network data points (as configured). Data point 1 (Code
dC6-13 Network Data 6) is generally the humidity sensor and its value is obtained from the Control-
Points 1-8 ler once every minute.
dC14 Cargo Probe 4 Tem- Current reading of the cargo probe #4.
perature
dC15-19 Future Expansion These codes are for future expansion, and are not in use at this time.
Current calibration offset values for each of the five probes: supply, return,
dC20-24 Temperature Sen- USDA #1, #2, and #3. These values are entered via the interrogation pro-
sors 1-5 Calibration gram.
dC25 Future Expansion This code is for future expansion, and is not in use at this time.
The DataCORDER serial number consists of eight characters. Function code
dC26,27 S/N, Left 4, Right 4 dC26 contains the first four characters. Function code dC27 contains the last
four characters. (This serial number is the same as the Controller serial num-
ber)
dC28 Minimum Days Left An approximation of the number of logging days remaining until the Data-
CORDER starts to overwrite the existing data.
dC29 Days Stored Number of days of data that are currently stored in the DataCORDER.
The date when a Trip Start was initiated by the user. In addition, if the system
dC30 Date of last Trip start goes without power for seven continuous days or longer, a trip start will auto-
matically be generated on the next AC power up. Press and hold “ENTER”
key for 5 seconds to initiate a “Trip Start”.
Shows the current status of the optional battery pack.
dC31 Battery Test PASS: Battery pack is fully charged.
FAIL: Battery pack voltage is low.
dC32 Time: Hour, Minute Current time on the real time clock (RTC) in the DataCORDER.
dC33 Date: Month, Day Current date (month and day) on the RTC in the DataCORDER.
dC34 Date: Year Current year on the RTC in the DataCORDER.
dC35 Cargo Probe 4 Current calibration value for the Cargo Probe. This value is an input via the
Calibration interrogation program.
T-320 3-24
Table 3-9 DataCORDER Pre-Trip Result Records
Test TITLE DATA
No.
1-0 Heater On Pass/Fail/Skip Result, Change in current for Phase A, B and C
1-1 Heater Off Pass/Fail/Skip Result, Change in currents for Phase A, B and C
2-0 Condenser Fan On Pass/Fail/Skip Result, Water pressure switch (WPS) -- Open/Closed,
Change in currents for Phase A, B and C
2-1 Condenser Fan Off Pass/Fail/Skip Result, Change in currents for Phase A, B and C
3-0 Low Speed Evaporator Fan Pass/Fail/Skip Result, Change in currents for Phase A, B and C
On
3-1 Low Speed Evaporator Fan Pass/Fail/Skip Result, Change in currents for Phase A, B and C
On
4-0 High Speed Evaporator Fan Pass/Fail/Skip Result, Change in currents for Phase A, B and C
On
4-1 High Speed Evaporator Fan Pass/Fail/Skip Result, Change in currents for Phase A, B and C
On
5-0 Supply/Return Probe Test Pass/Fail/Skip Result, STS, RTS, SRS and RRS
5-1 Secondary Supply Probe Test Pass/Fail/Skip
5-2 Secondary Return Probe Test Pass/Fail/Skip
6-0 Discharge Thermistor Test Pass/Fail/Skip
6-1 Suction Thermistor Test Pass/Fail/Skip
6-2 Discharge Pressure Sensor Pass/Fail/Skip
Test
6-3 Suction Pressure Sensor Test Pass/Fail/Skip
6-4 Compressor Current Draw Pass/Fail/Skip
Test
6-5 Suction Modulation valve Test Pass/Fail/Skip
6-6 Economizer Valve Test Pass/Fail/Skip
6-7 Unloader Valve Test Pass/Fail/Skip
7-0 High Pressure Switch Closed Pass/Fail/Skip Result, AMBS, DPT or CPT (if equipped)
Input values that component opens
7-1 High Pressure Switch Open Pass/Fail/Skip Result, STS, DPT or CPT (if equipped)
Input values that component closes
8-0 Perishable Mode Heat Test Pass/Fail/Skip Result, STS, time it takes to heat to 16_C (60_F)
8-1 Perishable Mode Pull Down Pass/Fail/Skip Result, STS, time it takes to pull down to 0_C (32_F)
Test
8-2 Perishable Mode Maintain Pass/Fail/Skip Result, Averaged DataCORDER supply temperature
Test (SRS) over last recording interval.
9-0 Defrost Test Pass/Fail/Skip Result, DTS reading at end of test, line voltage, line
frequency, time in defrost.
10-0 Frozen Mode Heat Test Pass/Fail/Skip Result, STS, time unit is in heat.
10-1 Frozen Mode Pull Down Test Pass/Fail/Skip Result, STS, time to pull down unit to --17.8_C (0_F).
10-2 Frozen Mode Maintain Test Pass/Fail/Skip Result, Averaged DataCORDER return temperature
(RRS) over last recording interval.
3-25 T-320
Table 3-10 DataCORDER Alarm Indications
To Access: Press ALT. MODE key
Code No. TITLE DESCRIPTION
The supply recorder sensor reading is outside of the range of --50_C to
70_C (--58_F to +158_F) or, the probe check logic has determined there is
Recorder Supply Tem- a fault with this sensor.
dAL70
perature Out of Range
NOTE
The return recorder sensor reading is outside of the range of --50_C to
70_C (--58_F to +158_F) or, the probe check logic has determined there is
Recorder Return Tem- a fault with this sensor.
dAL71
perature Out of Range
NOTE
dAL72-74 USDA Temperatures The USDA probe temperature reading is sensed outside of --50 to 70°C
1, 2, 3 Out of Range (--58 to 158°F) range.
dAL75 Cargo Probe 4 Out of The cargo probe temperature reading is outside of --50 to 70°C (--58 to
Range 158°F) range.
dAL76, 77 Future Expansion These alarms are for future expansion, and are not in use at this time.
The network data point is outside of its specified range. The DataCORD-
ER is configured by default to record the supply and return recorder sen-
sors. The DataCORDER may be configured to record up to 8 additional
dAL78-85 Network Data Point network data points. An alarm number (AL78 to AL85) is assigned to each
1 -- 8 Out of Range
configured point. When an alarm occurs, the DataCORDER must be inter-
rogated to identify the data point assigned. When a humidity sensor is
installed, it is usually assigned to AL78.
dAL86 RTC Battery Low The Real Time Clock (RTC) backup battery is too low to adequately main-
tain the RTC reading.
An invalid date or time has been detected. This situation may be corrected
dAL87 RTC Failure by changing the Real Time Clock (RTC) to a valid value using the Data-
View.
dAL88 DataCORDER A write of critical DataCORDER information to the EEPROM has failed.
EEPROM Failure
dAL89 Flash Memory Error An error has been detected in the process of writing daily data to the non-
volatile FLASH memory.
dAL90 Future Expansion This alarm is for future expansion, and is not in use at this time.
dAL91 Alarm List Full The DataCORDER alarm queue is determined to be full (eight alarms).
T-320 3-26
SECTION 4
OPERATION
4.1 INSPECTION (Before Starting) 2. Plug the 460 vac (yellow) cable into a de-energized
380/460 vac, 3-phase power source. Energize the
power source. Place circuit breaker (CB-1) in position
WARNING “I” (ON). Close and secure control box door
4.2.2 Connection to190/230 vac Power
Beware of unannounced starting of the
evaporator and condenser fans. The unit An autotransformer (Figure 4-1) is required to allow
may cycle the fans and compressor unex- operation on nominal 230 volt power. It is fitted with a
230 vac cable and a receptacle to accept the standard
pectedly as control requirements dictate. 460 vac power plug. The 230 volt cable is black in color
a. If container is empty, check inside for the following: while the 460 volt cable is yellow. The transformer may
also be equipped with a circuit breaker (CB-2). The
1. Check channels or “T” bar floor for cleanliness. transformer is a step up transformer that will provide
Channels must be free of debris for proper air cir- 380/460 vac, 3-phase, 50/60 hertz power to the unit
culation. when the 230 vac power cable is connected to a
2. Check container panels, insulation and door seals 190/230 vac, 3-phase power source.
for damage. Effect permanent or temporary repairs. 1. Make sure that the start-stop switch (ST, on control
3. Visually check evaporator fan motor mounting bolts panel) and circuit breakers CB-1 (in the control box
for proper securement (refer to paragraph 6.15). and CB-2 (on the transformer) are in position “0”
(OFF). Plug in and lock the 460 vac power plug at the
4. Check for dirt or grease on evaporator fan or fan receptacle on the transformer
deck and clean if necessary.
5. Check evaporator coil for cleanliness or obstruc- 2. Plug the 230 vac (black) cable into a de-energized
tions. Wash with fresh water. 190/230 vac, 3-phase power source. Energize the
power source. Set circuit breakers CB-1 and CB2 to
6. Check defrost drain pans and drain lines for obstruc- position “I” (ON). Close and secure control box door.
tions and clear if necessary. Wash with fresh water.
7. Check panels on refrigeration unit for loose bolts and
condition of panels. Make sure T.I.R. devices are in 2 3
place on access panels.
b. Check condenser coil for cleanliness. Wash with
fresh water. 1
c. Open control box door. Check for loose electrical con-
nections or hardware.
d. Check color of moisture-liquid indicator.
e. Check oil level in compressor sight glass. 1. Dual Voltage Modular
Autotransformer
4.2 CONNECT POWER 2. Circuit Breaker
(CB-2) 230V
WARNING 3. 460 vac Power Receptacle
Do not attempt to remove power plug(s) be- Figure 4-1 Autotransformer

fore turning OFF start-stop switch (ST), unit
circuit breaker(s) and external power
source. 4.3 ADJUST FRESH AIR MAKEUP VENT
The purpose of the fresh air makeup vent is to provide
ventilation for commodities that require fresh air
WARNING circulation. The vent must be closed when transporting
frozen foods.
Make sure the power plugs are clean and
dry before connecting to power receptacle. Air exchange depends on static pressure differential,
which will vary depending on the container and how the
4.2.1 Connection To 380/460 vac Power container is loaded.
1. Make sure start-stop switch (ST, on control panel) Units may be equipped with a Vent Position Sensor
and circuit breaker (CB-1, in the control box) are in (VPS). The VPS determines the position of the fresh air
position “0” (OFF). vent and sends data to the controller display.
4-1 T-320
4.3.1 Upper Fresh Air Makeup Vent position (100% position). The closed position is 0% air
flow position.The operator may also adjust the opening
Two slots and a stop are designed into the disc for air to increase or decrease the air flow volume to meet the
flow adjustments. The first slot allows for a 0 to 30% air required air flow.
flow, and the second slot allows for a 30 to 100% air flow.
To adjust the percentage of air flow, loosen the wing nut b. Reduced Flow for Fresh Air Makeup
and rotate the disc until the desired percentage of air
flow matches with the arrow. Tighten the wing nut. To On some models the air slide is supplied with two
clear the gap between the slots, loosen the wing nut until adjustable air control disks. The fresh air makeup can be
the disc clears the stop. Figure 4-2 gives air exchange adjusted for (15, 35, 50 or 75) cubic meters per hour
values for an empty container. Higher values can be (CMH). The air flow has been established at 60HZ
expected for a fully loaded container. power and 2 1/2 inch T bar and with 15mm (.6 inch) H2O
external static above free blow.
AIR Loosen the hex nut and adjust each disk to the required
FLOW
50HZ
air flow and tighten hex nut.
(CMH) T-BAR
240 1-!/2”
NOTE
210 T-BAR The main air slide is in the fully closed position
2-%/8” during reduced air flow operation.
180
T-BAR
3” c. Adjustment
150
The air slide is supplied with two adjustable air control
120 discs. The fresh air makeup can be adjusted for 15, 35,
50 and 75 cubic meters per hour (CFM). The air flow has
90 been established at 60 Hz power, and a 2 1/2 inch T bar,
with 15 mm (0.6 inch) H2O external static above free
60 blow.
NOTE
30
The main air slide is in the fully closed position
0 during reduced air flow operation.
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
PERCENT OPEN d. Air Sampling for Carbon Dioxide (CO2) Level
Loosen hex nuts and move the cover until the arrow on
the cover is aligned with the “atmosphere sampling port”
AIR label. Tighten the hex nuts and attach a 3/8 hose to the
FLOW 60HZ
T-BAR sampling port.
(CMH)
1-!/2”
280
If the internal atmosphere content has reached an
T-BAR
240 2-%/8” unacceptable level, the operator may adjust the disc
T-BAR
opening to meet the required air flow volume to ventilate
200 3” the container.
160 4.3.3 Fresh Air Position Sensor
120 The VPS allows the user to determine position of the
fresh air vent via function code 45. This function code is
80 accessible via the code select key.
40 The vent position will display for 30 seconds whenever

motion corresponding to 5 CMH (3 CFM) or greater is
0 detected. It will scroll in intervals of 5 CMH (3 CFM).
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 Scrolling to Function Code 45 will display the Fresh Air
PERCENT OPEN Vent Position.
Data Recording of the Sensor Position -- The position of
Figure 4-2 Make Up Air Flow Chart the vent will be recorded in the DataCorder whenever
the unit is running under AC power and any of the
4.3.2 Lower Fresh Air Makeup Vent following:
Trip start
a. Full Open or Closed Positions On every power cycle
Midnight
Maximum air flow is achieved by loosening the wing Manual change greater than 5 CMH (3 CFM) and
nuts and moving the cover to the maximum open remains in that position for 4 minutes.
T-320 4-2
NOTE 4.5 CONNECT REMOTE MONITORING
The user has 4 minutes to make necessary ad- RECEPTACLE
justments to the vent setting. This time begins If remote monitoring is required, connect remote
on the initial movement of the sensor. The vent monitor plug at unit receptacle. When the remote
can be moved to any position within the 4 min- monitor plug is connected to the remote monitoring
receptacle, the following remote circuits are energized:
utes. On completion of the first 4 minutes, the
vent is required to remain in stable for the next 4
minutes. If vent position changes are detected CIRCUIT FUNCTION
during the 4 minutes stability period, an alarm
Sockets B to A Energizes remote cool light
will be generated. This provides the user with
the ability to change the vent setting without Sockets C to A Energizes remote defrost light
generating multiple events in the DataCorder. Sockets D to A Energizes remote in-range light
4.6 STARTING AND STOPPING INSTRUCTIONS
4.4 CONNECT WATER-COOLED CONDENSER

The water-cooled condenser is used when cooling WARNING
water is available and heating the surrounding air is
objectionable, such as in a ship’s hold. If water cooled Make sure that the unit circuit breaker(s)
operation is desired, connect in accordance with the (CB-1 & CB-2) and the START-STOP switch
following subparagraphs. (ST) are in the “O” (OFF) position before
4.4.1 Water--Cooled Condenser with Water Pres- connecting to any electrical power source.
sure Switch 4.6.1 Starting the Unit
a. Connect the water supply line to the inlet side of con- a. With power properly applied, the fresh air damper set
denser and the discharge line to the outlet side of the and (if required) the water cooled condenser con-
condenser. (See Figure 2-5.) nected, (refer to paragraphs 4.2, 4.3 & 4.4) place the
b. Maintain a flow rate of 11 to 26 liters per minute (3 to 7 START-STOP switch to “I” (ON).
gallons per minute). The water pressure switch will
open to de-energize the condenser fan relay. The NOTE
condenser fan motor will stop and will remain stopped Within the first 30 seconds the electronic phase
until the water pressure switch closes. detection system will check for proper com-
c. To shift to air-cooled condenser operation,disconnect pressor rotation. If rotation is not correct, the
the water supply and the discharge line to the water- compressor will be stopped and restarted in the
cooled condenser. The refrigeration unit will shift to opposite direction. If the compressor is produc-
air-cooled condenser operation when the water pres- ing unusually loud and continuous noise after
sure switch closes. the first 30 seconds of operation, stop the unit
4.4.2 Water-Cooled Condenser with Condenser and investigate.
Fan Switch b Continue with Start Up Inspection, paragraph 4.7.
a. Connect the water supply line to the inlet side of con- 4.6.2 Stopping the Unit
denser and the discharge line to the outlet side of the
condenser. (See Figure 2-5.) To stop the unit, place the START-STOP switch in
position “0” (OFF).
b. Maintain a flow rate of 11 to 26 lpm (3 to 7 gpm).
c. Set the condenser fan switch to position ”O”. This will 4.7 START--UP INSPECTION
de-energize the condenser fan relay. The condenser 4.7.1 Physical Inspection
fan motor will stop and remain stopped until the CFS
switch is set to position ”I.” a. Check rotation of condenser and evaporator fans.
b. Check compressor oil level. (Refer to paragraph 6.6.)
4.7.2 Check Controller Function Codes
CAUTION Check and, if required, reset controller Function Codes
(Cd27 through Cd39) in accordance with desired
When condenser water flow is below 11 lpm operating parameters. Refer to paragraph 3.2.2.
(3 gpm) or when water-cooled operation is
not in use, the CFS switch MUST be set to 4.7.3 Start Temperature Recorder
position ”1” or the unit will not operate Partlow Recorders
properly. a. Open recorder door and wind mechanical clock or
check battery of electronic recorder. Be sure key is re-
d. To shift to air-cooled condenser operation, stop the turned to storage clip of mechanical recorder.
unit, set the CFS switch to position ”I” and restart the
unit. Disconnect the water lines to the water-cooled b. Lift stylus (pen) by pulling the marking tip outward un-
condenser. til the stylus arm snaps into it’s retracted position.
4-3 T-320
c. Install new chart making sure chart is under the four To start a pre--trip test, do the following:
corner tabs. Lower the stylus until it has made contact
with the chart. Close and secure door. NOTE
DataCORDER 1. Prior to starting tests, verify that unit
a. Check and, if required, set the DataCORDER Config- voltage (Function Code Cd 07) is within
uration in accordance with desired recording parame- tolerance and unit amperage draw
ter. Refer to paragraph 3.6.3. (Function Codes Cd04, Cd05, Cd06) are
within expected limits. Otherwise, tests
b. Enter a “Trip Start”. To enter a “trip Start”, do the fol- may fail incorrectly.
lowing:
2. All alarms must be rectified and cleared
1. Depress the ALT MODE key and scroll to Code
dC30. before starting tests.
2. Depress and hold the ENTER key for five seconds. 3. Pre-trip may also be initiated via
communications. The operation is the
3. The “Trip Start” event will be entered in the Data- same as for the key pad initiation described
CORDER. below except that should a test fail, the
4.7.4 Complete Inspection pre-trip mode will automatically terminate.
Allow unit to run for 5 minutes to stabilize conditions and When initiated via communications, a test
perform a pre--trip diagnosis in accordance with the may not be interrupted with an arrow key,
following paragraph. but the pre-trip mode can be terminated
with the PRE-TRIP key.
4.8 PRE-TRIP DIAGNOSIS a. Press the PRE-TRIP key. This accesses a test selec-
tion menu.
b. TO RUN AN AUTOMATIC TEST: Scroll through the
CAUTION selections by pressing the UP ARROW or DOWN
ARROW keys to display AUTO, AUTO 1, AUTO 2 or
Pre-trip inspection should not be per- AUTO 3 as desired and then press the AUTO key.
formed with critical temperature cargoes in 1. The unit will execute the series of tests without any
the container. need for direct user interface. These tests vary in
length, depending on the component under test.
2. While tests are running, “P#-#” will appear on the left
CAUTION display, where the #’s indicate the test number and
sub-test. The right display will show a countdown time
When Pre-Trip key is pressed, economy, de- in minutes and seconds, indicating how much time
humidification and bulb mode will be deac- there is left remaining in the test.
tivated. At the completion of Pre-Trip activi-
ty, economy, dehumidification and bulb
mode must be reactivated.
CAUTION
Pre-Trip diagnosis provides automatic testing of the unit When a failure occurs during automatic
components using internal measurements and testing the unit will suspend operation
comparison logic. The program will provide a “PASS” or awaiting operator intervention.
“FAIL” display to indicate test results.
When an automatic test fails, it will be repeated once .
The testing begins with access to a pre-trip selection A repeated test failure will cause “FAIL” to be shown
menu. The user may have the option of selecting one of on the right display, with the corresponding test num-
two automatic tests. These tests will automatically ber to the left. The user may then press the DOWN
perform a series of individual pre--trip tests. The user ARROW to repeat the test, the UP ARROW to skip to
may also scroll down to select any of the individual tests. the next test or the PRE--TRIP key to terminate test-
When only the short sequence is configured it will ing. The unit will wait indefinitely, until the user manu-
appear as “AUtO” in the display, otherwise “AUtO1” will ally enters a command.
indicate the short sequence and “AUtO2” will indicate
the long sequence. The test short sequence will run
tests P0 through P6. The long test sequence will run
tests P0 through P10. CAUTION
A detailed description of the pre-trip test codes is listed When Pre--Trip test Auto 2 runs to comple-
in Table 3-7, page 3-20. If no selection is made, the tion without being interrupted, the unit will
pre-trip menu selection process will terminate
automatically. However, dehumidification and bulb terminate pre-trip and display “Auto 2”
mode must be reactivated manually if required. “end.” The unit will suspend operation until
the user depresses the ENTER key!
Scrolling down to the “rSLts” code and pressing ENTER
will allow the user to scroll through the results of the last When an Auto 1 runs to completion without a failure,
pre--trip testing run. If no pre--testing has been run (or an the unit will exit the pre-trip mode, and return to nor-
individual test has not been run) since the unit was mal control operation. However, dehumidification and
powered up “--------” will be displayed. bulb mode must be reactivated manually if required.
T-320 4-4
c. TO RUN AN INDIVIDUAL TEST: Scroll through the If 25 or more of 30 readings taken within a 30 minute
selections by pressing the UP ARROW or DOWN period are outside of the limit, then a defrost is initi-
ARROW keys to display an individual test code. ated and a probe check is performed.
Pressing ENTER when the desired test code is dis-
played. In this configuration, a probe check will be run as a part
of every normal (time initiated) defrost.
1. Individually selected tests, other than the LED/Dis- b. Probe Diagnostic Logic -- Special
play test, will perform the operations necessary to
verify the operation of the component. At the conclu- If the probe check option is configured for special the
sion, PASS or FAIL will be displayed. This message above criteria are applicable. A defrost with probe check
will remain displayed for up to three minutes, during will be initiated if 25 of 30 readings or 10 consecutive
which time a user may select another test. If the readings are outside of the limits
three minute time period expires, the unit will termi- In this configuration, a probe check will not be run as a
nate pre-trip and return to control mode operation. part of a normal defrost, but only as a part of a defrost
2. While the tests are being executed, the user may ter- initiated due to a diagnostic reading outside of the limits.
minate the pre-trip diagnostics by pressing and hold- c.The 30 minute timer will be reset at each of the follow-
ing the PRE-TRIP key. The unit will then resume nor- ing conditions:
mal operation. If the user decides to terminate a test
but remain at the test selection menu, the user may 1. At every power up.
press the UP ARROW key. When this is done all test 2. At the end of every defrost.
outputs will be de-energized and the test selection
menu will be displayed. 3. After every diagnostic check that does not fall out-
side of the limits as outlined above.
3. Throughout the duration of any pre-trip test except d. Probe Check
the P-7 high pressure switch tests, the current and
pressure limiting processes are active . A defrost cycle probe check is accomplished by
energizing just the evaporator motors for eight minutes
d. Pre-Trip Test Results at the end of the normal defrost. At the end of the eight
minute period the probes will be compared to a set of
At the end of the pre-trip test selection menu, the predetermined limits. The defrost indicator will remain
message “P,” “rSLts” (pre--trip results) will be displayed. on throughout this period.
Pressing the ENTER key will allow the user to see the
results for all subtests (i.e., 1-0, 1-1, etc). The results will Any probe(s) determined to be outside the limits will
be displayed as “PASS” or “FAIL” for all the tests run to cause the appropriate alarm code(s) to be displayed to
completion since power up. If a test has not been run identify which probe(s) needs to be replaced. The P5
since power up, “-- -- -- -- -- ” will be displayed. Once all Pre-Trip test must be run to inactivate alarms.
pre--test activity is completed, dehumidification and
bulb mode must be reactivated manually if required. 4.10 SEQUENCE OF OPERATION
General operation sequences for cooling, heating and
4.9 OBSERVE UNIT OPERATION defrost are provided in the following subparagraphs.
Schematic representation of controller action are
4.9.1 Probe Check provided in Figure 4-3 and Figure 4-4. Refer to Section
3 for detailed descriptions of special events and timers
If the DataCORDER is off or in alarm the controller will that are incorporated by the controller in specific modes
revert to a four probe configuration which includes the of operation.
DataCORDER supply and return air probes as the
secondary controller probes. The controller 4.10.1 Sequence Of operation -- Compressor Phase
continuously performs probe diagnosis testing which Sequence
compares the four probes. If the probe diagnosis result The controller logic will check for proper compressor
indicates a probe problem exists, the controller will rotation. If the compressor is rotating in the wrong
perform a probe check to identify the probe(s) in error. direction, the controller will energize or de--energize
a. Probe Diagnostic Logic -- Standard relay T6 as required (see Figure 4-5). Energizing relay
T6 will switch operation from compressor contactor PA
If the probe check option (controller configuration code to compressor contactor PB. De--energizing relay T6
CnF31) is configured for standard, the criteria used for will switch operation from compressor contactor PB to
comparison between the primary and secondary compressor contactor PA. Compressor contactors PA is
control probes is: wired to run the compressor on L1, L2, and L3.
Compressor contactor PB is wired to run the
1_C (1.8_F) for perishable set points or 2_C (3.6_F) compressor on L2, L1 and L3 thus providing reverse
for frozen set points. rotation .
4-5 T-320
FALLING RISING
PULL DOWN TEMPERATURE TEMPERATURE
+2.5_C +2.5_C
(4.5_F) (4.5_F)
START UNLOADED,
TRANSITION TO MODULATED MODULATED
COOLING COOLING
ECONOMIZED UNLOADED
OPERATION UNLOADED
+.20_C +.20_C
SET POINT SET POINT AIR CIRCULATION
UNLOADED OPERATION
--0.20_C --0.20_C
AIR CIRCULATION AIR CIRCULATION
--0.5_C --0.5_C
(0.9_F) (0.9_F)
HEATING HEATING HEATING
NOTE: TEMPERATURES INDICATIONS ARE ABOVE OR BELOW SET POINT
Figure 4-3 Controller Operation -- Perishable Mode
FALLING RISING
TEMPERATURE TEMPERATURE
START UNLOADED,
TRANSITION TO COOLING
ECONOMIZED ECONOMIZED
OPERATION
+.20_C
SET POINT
--0.20_C
AIR CIRCULATION
AIR CIRCULATION
NOTE: TEMPERATURES INDICATIONS ARE ABOVE OR BELOW SET POINT
Figure 4-4 Controller Operation -- Frozen Mode
T-320 4-6
ENERGIZED mains illuminated as long as the supply air is within
DE--ENERGIZED
FOR FULL DIAGRAM AND
CONTROL TRANSFORMER tolerance of set point.
LEGEND, SEE SECTION 7
POWER TO
g. If the supply air temperature increases to 0.2_C
CONTROLLER (0.4_F) above set point and the three minute off time
has elapsed, relays TD, TU and TN are energized to
T6 PB PA restart the compressor and condenser fan motors in
unloaded operation. The cool light is also illuminated.
TD T6 PA PB
ENERGIZED
DE--ENERGIZED
CONTROL TRANSFORMER
SIGNAL TO
POWER TO
CONTROLLER TU USV
CONTROLLER
TS ESV
T6 PB PA
TD T6 PA PB
NOTE: HIGH SPEED EVAPORATOR FAN SHOWN. FOR LOW SPEED
CONTACT TE IS DE--ENERGIZED AND CONTACT TV IS ENERGIZED
Figure 4-5 Perishable Mode

4.10.2 Sequence Of Operation -- Perishable Mode
Cooling
SIGNAL TO
NOTE CONTROLLER TU USV
In the Conventional Perishable Mode of opera- TS ESV

tion the evaporator motors run in high speed. In
the Economy Perishable Mode the fan speed is
varied. NOTE: HIGH SPEED EVAPORATOR FAN SHOWN. FOR LOW SPEED
CONTACT TE IS DE--ENERGIZED AND CONTACT TV IS ENERGIZED
a. With supply air temperature above set point and de-
creasing, the unit will be cooling with the condenser
fan motor (CF), compressor motor (PA or PB), evapo-
rator fan motors (EF) energized and the COOL light
illuminated. (See Figure 4-5.) Also, if current or pres-
sure limiting is not active, the controller will energize Figure 4-6 Perishable Mode Heating
relay TS to open the economizer solenoid valve
(ESV) and place the unit in economized operation.
4.10.3 Sequence Of Operation --
b. When the air temperature decreases to a predeter- Perishable Mode Heating
mined tolerance above set point, the in-range light is
illuminated.
a. If the air temperature decreases 0.5_C (0.9_F) below
c. As the air temperature continues to fall, modulating set point, the system enters the heating mode. (See
cooling starts at approximately 2.5_C (4.5_F) above Figure 4-3). The controller closes contacts TH (see
set point. (See Figure 4-3.) At set point, relay TS is Figure 4-6) to allow power flow through the heat ter-
de--energized to close the economizer solenoid valve
and relay TU is energized to open the unloader sole- mination thermostat (HTT) to energize the heaters
noid valve changing from economized operation to (HR). The HEAT light is also illuminated. The evapo-
unloaded operation. (As shown in Figure 4-5) rator fans continue to run to circulate air throughout
the container.
d. The controller monitors the supply air. Once the sup-
ply air falls below set point the controller periodically
records the supply air temperature, set point and b. When the temperature rises to 0.2_C (0.4_F) above
time. A calculation is then performed to determine set point, contact TH opens to de--energize the heat-
temperature drift from set point over time. ers. The HEAT light is also de--energized. The evapo-
e. If the calculation determines cooling is no longer re- rator fans continue to run to circulate air throughout
quired, contacts TD and TN are opened to de-ener- the container.
gize compressor motor and condenser fan motor.
The cool light is also de-energized. c. A safety heater termination thermostat (HTT), at-
f. The evaporator fan motors continue to run to circulate tached to an evaporator coil support, will open the
air throughout the container. The in-range light re- heating circuit if overheating occurs.
4-7 T-320
4.10.4 Sequence Of operation -- Frozen Mode 4.10.5 Sequence Of Operation -- Defrost
Cooling
The defrost cycle may consist of up to three distinct
operations. The first is de-icing of the coil, the second is
a. With supply air temperature above set point and de- a probe check cycle and the third is snap freeze.
creasing, the unit will transition to economized cool-
ing with the condenser fan motor (CF), compressor Defrost may be initiated by any one of the following
motor (CH), economizer solenoid valve (ESV), low methods:
speed evaporator fan motors (ES) energized and the 1. The manual defrost function (also manual defrost
COOL light illuminated. (See Figure 4-7.) switch function if equipped) is initiated and ended by
the user. Through the use of the keypad or manual
b.When the air temperature decreases to a predeter- defrost sitch (if equipped).
mined tolerance above set point, the in-range light is
illuminated. NOTE
The Manual Defrost / Interval key can be used
ENERGIZED
CONTROL TRANSFORMER
to initiate a manual defrost. Minimum Software
DE--ENERGIZED
release version #5126 is required in order for to
LEGEND, SEE SECTION 7 use this function
POWER TO
CONTROLLER
Manual Defrost/Interval key operation:
Depressing and holding the Defrost Interval key for
T6 PB PA five (5) seconds will initiate defrost. If the defrost in-
terval key is released in less than five (5) seconds,
TD T6 PA PB defrost interval (code 27) shall be displayed.
2. The user sends a defrost command by communica-
tions.
3. The defrost interval timer (controller function code
Cd27) reaches the defrost interval set by the user.
4. The controller probe diagnostic logic determines that
a probe check is necessary based on the tempera-
SIGNAL TO
CONTROLLER TU USV
ture values currently reported by the supply and re-
turn probes.
TS ESV
5. If the controller is programmed with the Demand De-
frost option (Future) and the option is set to “IN” the
unit will enter defrost if it has been in operation for
over 2.5 hours without reaching set point.
ENERGIZED
Figure 4-7 Frozen Mode DE--ENERGIZED CONTROL TRANSFORMER

c. When the return air temperature decreases to 0.2_C
(0.4_F) below set point, contacts TD, TS and TN are POWER TO
opened to de-energize the compressor, economizer CONTROLLER
solenoid valve and condenser fan motors. The cool

light is also de-energized. T6 PB PA
TD T6 PA PB
d. The evaporator fan motors continue to run in low
speed to circulate air throughout the container. The
in-range light remains illuminated as long as the re-
turn air is within tolerance of set point.
e. When return air temperature is 10_C (18_F) or more

below set point, the evaporator fans are brought to
high speed. SIGNAL TO
CONTROLLER TU USV
f. When the return air temperature increases to 0.2_C TS ESV

(0.4_F) above set point and the three minute off time
has elapsed, relays TD, TS and TN are energizes to
restart the compressor and condenser fan motors.
The cool light is illuminated. Figure 4-8 Defrost
T-320 4-8
Defrost may be initiated any time the defrost 4.10.6 Emergency Bypass Operation
temperature sensor reading falls below the controller To place the unit in the emergency bypass mode, cut the
defrost termination thermostat set point. Defrost will
terminate when the defrost temperature sensor reading wire tie installed at the switch mounting and place the
rises above the defrost termination thermostat set point. EMERGENCY BYPASS switch in the ON position
The defrost termination thermostat is not a physical which will in turn activate the Emergency Bypass
component. It is a controller setting that acts as a System (EBS) control module.
thermostat, “closing” (allowing defrost) when the defrost
temperature sensor reading is below the set point and To operate the fans only the MODE switch must be in
“opening” (terminating or preventing defrost) when the the FANS ONLY position and the EMERGENCY
sensor temperature reading is above set point. When BYPASS Switch must be in the ON position.
the unit is operating in bulb mode (refer to paragraph The EBS module uses the system’s safety devices (high
3.3.9), special settings may be applicable.
pressure switch, motor internal protectors, and heat
If the controller is programmed with the Lower DTT termination thermostat) to protect the system while in
setting option the defrost termination thermostat set
point may be configured to the default of 25.6_C (78_F) Emergency Bypass Mode.
or lowered to 18_C (64_F). When a request for defrost is
made by use of the manual defrost switch,
communications or probe check the unit will enter
defrost if the defrost temperature thermostat reading is
at or below the defrost termination thermostat setting.
Defrost will terminate with the defrost temperature
CAUTION
sensor reading rises above the defrost termination
thermostat setting. When a request for defrost is made The unit will remain in the full cooling mode
by the defrost intermale timer or by demand defrost, the
defrost temperature setting setting must be below 10_C as long as the emergency bypass switch is
(50_F). in the BYPASS position and the MODE
When the defrost mode is initiated the controller opens SWITCH is in the FULL COOL position. If
contacts TD, TN and TE (or TV) to de-energize the the cargo may be damaged by low tempera-
compressor, condenser fan and evaporator fans. The tures, the operator must monitor container
COOL light is also de--energized. temperature and manually cycle operation
The controller then closes TH to supply power to the as required to maintain temperature within
heaters. The defrost light is illuminated. required limits.
When the defrost temperature sensor reading rises to
the defrost termination thermostat setting, the de--icing
operation is terminated. In the ON position the EBS will be enabled. With the
If defrost does not terminate correctly and temperature MODE SWITCH in the FULL COOL MODE. The
reaches the set point of the heat termination thermostat following will occur simultaneously:
(HTT) the thermostat will open to de--energize the
heaters. If termination does not occur within 2.0 hours, 1. The EBS switch will enable EBS input.
the controller will terminate defrost. An alarm will be
given of a possible DTS failure.
If probe check (controller function code CnF31) is 2. The phase detection circuit will detect the phase
configured to special, the unit will proceed to the next rotation and close to provide power to the compres-
operation (snap freeze or terminate defrost). If the code sor contactor.
is configured to standard, the unit will perform a probe
check. The purpose of the probe check is to detect
malfunctions or drift in the sensed temperature that is 3. The condenser fan contact will close to energize the
too small to be detected by the normal sensor out of condenser contactor and provide power to the con-
range tests. The system will run for eight minutes in this denser fan motor.
condition. At the end of the eight minutes, probe alarms
will be set or cleared based on the conditions seen. 4. The evaporator fan contact will close to energize the
When the return air falls to 7_C (45_F), the controller high speed evaporator contactor and provide power
checks to ensure the defrost temperature sensor (DTS) to the evaporator fan motor.
reading has dropped to 10_C or below. If it has not, a
DTS failure alarm is given and the defrost mode is
operated by the return temperature sensor (RTS). 5. The EBS electronic module will open the SMV to
If controller function code CnF33 is configured to snap 100%.
freeze, the controller will sequence to this operation.
The snap freeze consists of running the compressor To return the unit to normal operation, place the EBS
without the evaporator fans in operation for a period of
four minutes with the suction modulation valve fully switch in the NORMAL OPERATION position. When
open. When the snap freeze is completed, defrost is emergency operation is no longer required, re--install
formally terminated. the wire tie at the switch mounting.
4-9 T-320
SECTION 5
TROUBLESHOOTING
REMEDY/
CONDITION POSSIBLE CAUSE REFERENCE
SECTION
5.1 UNIT WILL NOT START OR STARTS THEN STOPS
External power source OFF Turn on
Start-Stop switch OFF or defective Check
No power to unit
Circuit breaker tripped or OFF Check
Autotransformer not connected 4.2.2
Circuit breaker OFF or defective Check
Control transformer defective Replace
Loss of control power
Fuse (F3A/F3B) blown Check
Evaporator fan motor internal protector open 6.15
Condenser fan motor internal protector open 6.9
Compressor internal protector open 6.5
Component(s) Not Operating High pressure switch open 5.7
Heat termination thermostat open Replace
Loss of communication with expansion module Check Wiring
Malfunction of current sensor Replace
Low line voltage Check
Compressor hums, but does not Single phasing Check
start Shorted or grounded motor windings 6.5
Compressor seized 6.5
5.2 UNIT OPERATES LONG OR CONTINUOUSLY IN COOLING
Hot load Normal
Container
Defective box insulation or air leak Repair
Shortage of refrigerant 6.4
Evaporator coil covered with ice 5.6
Evaporator coil plugged with debris 6.13
Evaporator fan(s) rotating backwards 6.13/6.15
Defective evaporator fan motor/capacitor 6.16
Air bypass around evaporator coil Check
Controller set too low Reset
Compressor service valves or liquid line shutoff valve par- Open valves
Refrigeration System tially closed completely
Dirty condenser 6.8
Compressor worn 6.5
Current limit (function code Cd32) set to wrong value 3.3.4
Suction modulation valve lost track of step count Power cycle
Suction modulation valve malfunction 6.18
Economizer solenoid valve or TXV malfunction 6.12, 6.17
Unloader valve stuck open 6.17
5-1 T-320
REMEDY/
SECTION
5.3 UNIT RUNS BUT HAS INSUFFICIENT COOLING
Abnormal pressures 5.7
Abnormal temperatures 5.15
Abnormal currents 5.16
Controller malfunction 5.9
Evaporator fan or motor defective 6.15
Shortage of refrigerant 6.4
Refrigeration System Suction modulation valve lost track of step count Power cycle
Compressor service valves or liquid line shutoff valve par- Open valves
tially closed completely
Economizer solenoid valve or TXV malfunction 6.12, 6.17
Unloader valve stuck open 6.17
Frost on coil 5.10
5.4 UNIT WILL NOT HEAT OR HAS INSUFFICIENT HEATING
No operation of any kind Circuit breaker OFF or defective Check
External power source OFF Turn ON
Circuit breaker or fuse defective Replace
Control Transformer defective Replace
No control power Evaporator fan internal motor protector open 6.15
Heat relay defective Check
Heater termination thermostat open 6.13
Heater(s) defective 6.13
Heater contactor or coil defective Replace
Evaporator fan motor(s) defective or rotating backwards 6.13/6.15
Unit will not heat or has insuffi- Evaporator fan motor contactor defective Replace
cient heat Controller malfunction 5.9
Defective wiring Replace
Loose terminal connections Tighten
Low line voltage 2.3
5.5 UNIT WILL NOT TERMINATE HEATING
Controller improperly set Reset
Controller malfunction 5.9
Unit fails to stop heating
Heater termination thermostat remains closed along with 6.13
the heat relay
5.6 UNIT WILL NOT DEFROST PROPERLY
Defrost timer malfunction (Cd27) Table 3-5
Loose terminal connections Tighten/
Will not initiate defrost Defective wiring Replace
automatically
i ll Defrost temperature sensor defective or heat termination Replace
thermostat open
T-320 5-2
REMEDY/
SECTION
5.6 UNIT WILL NOT DEFROST PROPERLY -- Continued
Will not initiate defrost Manual defrost switch defective Replace
manually Defrost temperature sensor open 4.10.5
Initiates but relay (DR) drops Low line voltage 2.3
out
Initiates but does not defrost
Heater(s) burned out 6.13
Frequent defrost Wet load Normal
5.7 ABNORMAL PRESSURES (COOLING)
Condenser coil dirty 6.8
Condenser fan rotating backwards 6.9
Condenser fan inoperative 6.9
High discharge pressure
Refrigerant overcharge or noncondensibles 6.4
Discharge service valve partially closed Open
Faulty suction pressure transducer Replace
Suction service valve partially closed Open
Filter-drier partially plugged 6.11
Low refrigerant charge 6.4
Low suction pressure Expansion valve defective 6.12
No evaporator air flow or restricted air flow 6.13
Excessive frost on evaporator coil 5.6
Evaporator fan(s) rotating backwards 6.15.3
Suction and discharge pres- Compressor operating in reverse 5.14
sures tend to equalize when unit
is operating Compressor cycling/stopped Check
5.8 ABNORMAL NOISE OR VIBRATIONS
Compressor start up after an extended shutdown
Normal
Brief chattering when manually shut down
Compressor operating in reverse 5.14
Compressor Loose mounting bolts or worn resilient mounts Tighten/Replace
Loose upper mounting 6.5.1 step t.
Liquid slugging 6.12
Insufficient oil 6.6
Bent, loose or striking venturi Check
Condenser or Evaporator Fan Worn motor bearings 6.9/6.15
Bent motor shaft 6.9/6.15
5-3 T-320
REMEDY/
SECTION
5.9 CONTROLLER MALFUNCTION
Defective Sensor 6.22
Defective wiring Check
Will not control
Stepper motor suction modulation valve circuit malfunction 6.18
5.10 NO EVAPORATOR AIR FLOW OR RESTRICTED AIR FLOW
Frost on coil 5.6
Evaporator coil blocked
Dirty coil 6.13
Evaporator fan motor internal protector open 6.15
Evaporator fan motor(s) defective 6.15
No or partial evaporator air flow
Evaporator fan(s) loose or defective 6.15
Evaporator fan contactor defective Replace
5.11 THERMOSTATIC EXPANSION VALVE MALFUNCTION
External equalizer line plugged Open
Wax, oil or dirt plugging valve or orifice Ice formation at 6.12
valve seat
Low suction pressure with high Superheat not correct 6.12.1
superheat
Power assembly failure
Loss of element/bulb charge
6 12
6.12
Broken capillary
Foreign material in valve
Superheat setting too low 6.12
High
Hi h suction
i pressure with
i h low
l External equalizer line plugged Ice holding valve open Open
superheat
Foreign material in valve 6.12
Liquid slugging in compressor Pin and seat of expansion valve eroded or held open by
foreign material
Improper bulb location or installation 6 12
6.12
Fluctuating suction pressure
Low superheat setting
5.12 AUTOTRANSFORMER MALFUNCTION
Circuit breaker (CB-1 or CB-2) tripped Check
Autotransformer defective 6.19
Unit will not start
Power source not turned ON Check
460 VAC power plug is not inserted into the receptacle 4.2.2
5.13 WATER-COOLED CONDENSER OR WATER PRESSURE SWITCH
Dirty coil
High discharge pressure 6 10
6.10
Noncondensibles
Water pressure switch malfunction Check
Condenser fan starts and stops
Water supply interruption Check
T-320 5-4
REMEDY/
SECTION
5.14 COMPRESSOR OPERATING IN REVERSE
CAUTION
Allowing the scroll compressor to operate in reverse for more than two minutes will result in internal
compressor damage. Turn the start--stop switch OFF immediately.
Incorrect wiring of compressor
Electrical Incorrect wiring of compressor contactor(s) Check
Incorrect wiring of current sensor
5.15 ABNORMAL TEMPERATURES
Discharge temperature sensor drifting high Replace
Failed economizer, TXV or solenoid valve Replace
High discharge temperature
Plugged economizer, TXV or solenoid valve Replace
Loose or insufficiently clamped sensor Replace
Discharge temperature sensor drifting low Replace
Low suction temperature
Loose or insufficiently clamped sensor Replace
5.16 ABNORMAL CURRENTS
Unit reads abnormal currents Current sensor wiring Check
5-5 T-320
SECTION 6
SERVICE
NOTE
To avoid damage to the earth’s ozone layer, use a refrigerant recovery system whenever removing refriger-
ant. When working with refrigerants you must comply with all local government environmental laws. In the
U.S.A., refer to EPA section 608.
pressure valve shut, the system can be charged. Oil can
WARNING also be added to the system.
A R-134a manifold gauge/hose set with self-sealing
Never use air for leak testing. It has been de- hoses (see Figure 6-2) is required for service of the
termined that pressurized, mixtures of re- models covered within this manual. The manifold
frigerant and air can undergo combustion gauge/hose set is available from Carrier Transicold.
(Carrier Transicold P/N 07-00294-00, which includes
when exposed to an ignition source. items 1 through 6, Figure 6-2.) To perform service using
the manifold gage/hose set, do the following:
6.1 SECTION LAYOUT a. Preparing Manifold Gauge/Hose Set For Use
Service procedures are provided herein beginning with 1. If the manifold gauge/hose set is new or was
refrigeration system service, then refrigeration system exposed to the atmosphere it will need to be eva-
component service, electrical system service, cuated to remove contaminants and air as follows:
temperature recorder service and general service. The 2. Back seat (turn counterclockwise )both field service
refrigeration section divided in to standard unit (with couplings (see Figure 6-2) and midseat both hand
service valves) and semi--hermetic systems (equipped valves.
with service fittings). Refer to the Table Of Contents to
locate specific topics. 3. Connect the yellow hose to a vacuum pump and re-
frigerant 134a cylinder.
6.2 MANIFOLD GAUGE SET
SUCTION DISCHARGE
The manifold gauge set (see Figure 6-1) is used to PRESSURE 1 PRESSURE
determine system operating pressure, add refrigerant GAUGE GAUGE
charge, and to equalize or evacuate the system.
OPENED CLOSED
(Backseated ) (Frontseated)
HAND VALVE HAND VALVE
SUCTION DISCHARGE
PRESSURE PRESSURE To Low Side To High Side
GAUGE GAUGE Access Valve Access Valve
3 2
BLUE 3
RED
A B C
3
OPENED (Backseated ) CLOSED (Frontseated) YELLOW
HAND VALVE 4 5
HAND VALVE 6 4
Blue Knob 2 Red Knob
A. CONNECTION TO LOW SIDE OF SYSTEM 1. Manifold Gauge Set
B. CONNECTION TO EITHER: 2. Hose Fitting (0.5-16 Acme)
REFRIGERANT CYLINDER OR 3. Refrigeration and/or Evacuation Hose
OIL CONTAINER . (SAE J2196/R-134a)
C. CONNECTION TO HIGH SIDE OF SYSTEM 4. Hose Fitting w/O-ring (M14 x 1.5)
5. High Side Field Service Coupling
6. Low Side Field Service Coupling
Figure 6-1 Manifold Gauge Set Figure 6-2 R-134a Manifold Gauge/Hose Set
When the suction pressure hand valve is frontseated 7. Evacuate to 10 inches of vacuum and then charge
(turned all the way in), the suction (low) pressure can be with R-134a to a slightly positive pressure of 0.1 kg/
checked. When the discharge pressure hand valve is cm@ (1.0 psig).
frontseated, the discharge (high) pressure can be
checked. When both valves are open (all the way out), 8. Front seat both manifold gauge set valves and dis-
high pressure vapor will flow into the low side. When the connect from cylinder. The gauge set is now ready
suction pressure valve is open and the discharge for use.
6-1 T-320
6.3 REFRIGERATION SYSTEM SERVICE-- UNITS b. Removing the Manifold Gauge Set
WITH STANDARD PIPING (with Service
Valves) 1. While the compressor is still ON, backseat the high
side service valve.
6.3.1 Service Connections
2. Midseat both hand valves on the manifold gauge set
The compressor suction, compressor discharge, and allow the pressure in the manifold gauge set to
compressor economizer, oil return and the liquid line be drawn down to low side pressure. This returns
service valves (see Figure 6-3) are provided with a any liquid that may be in the high side hose to the
double seat and an access valve which enable servicing system.
of the compressor and refrigerant lines. Turning the
valve stem clockwise (all the way forward) will frontseat 3. Backseat the low side service valve. Backseat both
the valve to close off the line connection and open a path field service couplings and frontseat both manifold
to the access valve. Turning the stem counterclockwise hand valves. Remove the couplings from the access
(all the way out) will backseat the valve to open the line valves.
connection and close off the path to the access valve.
With the valve stem midway between frontseat and 4. Install both service valve stem caps and service port
backseat, both of the service valve connections are caps (finger-tight only).
open to the access valve path. 6.3.2 Pumping Down the Unit
For example, the valve stem is first fully backseated
when connecting a manifold gauge to measure To service the filter-drier, economizer, expansion
pressure. Then, the valve is opened 1/4 to 1/2 turn to valves, suction modulation valve, economizer solenoid
measure the pressure. valve, unloader solenoid valve or evaporator coil, pump
the refrigerant into the high side as follows:
2 3
1 CAUTION
The scroll compressor achieves low suc-
tion pressure very quickly. Do not operate
the compressor in a deep vacuum, internal
5 damage will result.
4
a. Attach manifold gauge set to the compressor suction

VALVE VALVE and discharge service valves. Refer to paragraph 6.2.
FRONTSEATED BACKSEATED
(Clockwise) (Counterclockwise) b. Start the unit and run in the frozen mode (controller
set below --10°C (14°F) for 10 to 15 minutes.
1. Line Connection 4. Valve stem c. Check function code Cd21 (refer to paragraph 3.2.2).
2. Access Valve 5. Compressor Or Filter The economizer solenoid valve should be open. If
3. Stem Cap Drier Inlet Connection not, continue to run until the valve opens.
Figure 6-3 Service Valve d. Frontseat the oil return service valve then, frontseat
the liquid line service valve. Place start-stop switch in
To connect the manifold gauge/hose set for reading the OFF position when the suction reaches a positive
pressures, do the following: pressure of 0.1 kg/cm@ (1.0 psig).
1. Remove service valve stem cap and check to make
sure it is backseated. Remove access valve cap. e. Frontseat the economizer service valve and then
(See Figure 6-3) frontseat the suction and discharge service valves.
The refrigerant will be trapped between the compres-
2. Connect the field service coupling (see Figure 6-2) sor service valves and the liquid line valve.
to the access valve.
f. Before opening up any part of the system, a slight
3. Turn the field service coupling knob clockwise, which positive pressure should be indicated on the pressure
will open the system to the gauge set. gauge. If a vacuum is indicated, emit refrigerant by
cracking the liquid line valve momentarily to build up a
4. To read system pressures: slightly midseat the ser- slight positive pressure.
vice valve.
5. Repeat the procedure to connect the other side of g. When opening up the refrigerant system, certain
the gauge set. parts may frost. Allow the part to warm to ambient
temperature before dismantling. This avoids internal
condensation which puts moisture in the system.
CAUTION h. After repairs have been made, be sure to perform a
refrigerant leak check (refer to paragraph 6.3.3), and
To prevent trapping liquid refrigerant in the evacuate and dehydrate the low side (refer to para-
graph 6.3.4).
manifold gauge set be sure set is brought to
suction pressure before disconnecting. i. Check refrigerant charge (refer to paragraph 6.3.5).
T-320 6-2
6.3.3 Refrigerant Leak Checking gauge. (The pump is available from Carrier Trans-
icold, P/N 07-00176-11.)
c. If possible, keep the ambient temperature above
WARNING 15.6_C (60_F) to speed evaporation of moisture. If
the ambient temperature is lower than 15.6_C
Never use air for leak testing. It has been (60_F), ice might form before moisture removal is
determined that pressurized, air-rich mix- complete. Heat lamps or alternate sources of heat
tures of refrigerants and air can undergo may be used to raise the system temperature.
combustion when exposed to an ignition d. Additional time may be saved during a complete sys-
source. tem pump down by replaceing the filter-drier with a
section of copper tubing and the appropriate fittings.
a. The recommended procedure for finding leaks in a Installation of a new drier may be performed during
system is with a R-134a electronic leak detector. the charging procedure.
Testing joints with soapsuds is satisfactory only for 2 3
locating large leaks. 1
b. If the system is without refrigerant, charge the system 4
with refrigerant 134a to build up pressure between 2.1
to 3.5 kg/cm@ (30 to 50 psig). To ensure complete
pressurization of the system, refrigerant should be 5
charged at the compressor suction and economizer
service valves and the liquid line service valve. Also, 6
the area between the suction modulating valve and
evaporator expansion valve may not be open to these
charging points. Pressure between these compo-
nents may be checked at the low side access valve
(item 14, Figure 2-2) or by checking that the suction S D
modulating valve is more than 10% open at controller 11
function code Cd01. The suction modulating valve 9
may be opened by use of the controller function code
Cd41 valve override control (refer to paragraph 6.17).
Remove refrigerant cylinder and leak-check all con- 7
nections. 10
NOTE 8
Only refrigerant 134a should be used to pres-
surize the system. Any other gas or vapor will 1. Liquid Service Con- 6. Suction Service Con-
contaminate the system, which will require nection (if equipped)_ nection
additional purging and evacuation of the sys- 2. Receiver or Water 7. Vacuum Pump
tem. Cooled Condenser 8. Electronic Vacuum
3. Compressor Gauge
c. If required, remove refrigerant using a refrigerant 4. Discharge Service 9. Manifold Gauge Set
recovery system and repair any leaks. Check for
leaks. Connection 10. Refrigerant Cylinder
5. Economizer Service 11. Reclaimer
d. Evacuate and dehydrate the unit. (Refer to paragraph Connection
6.3.4.)
Figure 6-4. Refrigeration System Service Connec-
e. Charge unit per paragraph 6.3.5. tions
6.3.4 Evacuation and Dehydration Procedure - Complete system
General
NOTE
Moisture detrimental to refrigeration systems. The Refer to Partial System procedure for informa-
presence of moisture in a refrigeration system can have
many undesirable effects. The most common are tion pertaining to partial system evacuation and
copper plating, acid sludge formation, “freezing-up” of dehydration.
metering devices by free water, and formation of acids,
resulting in metal corrosion. a. Remove all refrigerant using a refrigerant recovery
Preparation system.
a. Evacuate and dehydrate only after pressure leak test. b. The recommended method to evacuate and dehy-
drate the system is to connect evacuation hoses at
b. Essential tools to properly evacuate and dehydrate the compressor suction, compressor economizer
any system include a vacuum pump (8 m3/hr = 5 cfm and liquid line service valve (see Figure 6-4). Be sure
volume displacement) and an electronic vacuum the service hoses are suited for evacuation purposes.
6-3 T-320
c. The area between the suction modulating valve and 1 2 3
evaporator expansion valve may not be open to the
access valves. To ensure evacuation of this area,
check that the suction modulating valve is more than
10% open at controller function code Cd01. If re- 4
quired, the suction modulating valve may be opened
by use of the controller function code Cd41 valve
override control. If power is not available to open the
valve, the area may be evacuated by connecting an
additional hose at the low side access valve (item 14,
Figure 2-2).
d. Test the evacuation setup for leaks by backseating 10 5

the unit service valves and drawing a deep vacuum 8
with the vacuum pump and gauge valves open. Shut S D
off the pump and check to see if the vacuum holds.
Repair leaks if necessary.
e. Midseat the refrigerant system service valves.
f. Open the vacuum pump and electronic vacuum 9 7 6

gauge valves, if they are not already open. Start the
vacuum pump. Evacuate unit until the electronic vac-
uum gauge indicates 2000 microns. Close the elec- 1. Receiver or Water 5. Suction Service Valve
tronic vacuum gauge and vacuum pump valves. Shut Cooled Condenser 6. Vacuum Pump
off the vacuum pump. Wait a few minutes to be sure 2. Compressor 7. Electronic Vacuum
the vacuum holds.
3. Discharge Service Gauge
g. Break the vacuum with clean dry refrigerant 134a Valve 8. Manifold Gauge Set
gas. Raise system pressure to approximately 0.2 kg/ 4. Economizer Service 9. Refrigerant Cylinder
cm@ (2 psig), monitoring it with the compound gauge. Valve 10. Reclaimer
h. Remove refrigerant using a refrigerant recovery sys- Figure 6-5. Standard Piping Compressor Service
tem. Connections
i. Repeat steps f.and g. one time. 6.3.5 Refrigerant Charge
j. Remove the copper tubing and change the filter-drier. Checking the Refrigerant Charge
Evacuate unit to 500 microns. Close the electronic
vacuum gauge and vacuum pump valves. Shut off the NOTE
vacuum pump. Wait five minutes to see if vacuum To avoid damage to the earth’s ozone layer, use
holds. This procedure checks for residual moisture a refrigerant recovery system whenever remov-
and/or leaks.
ing refrigerant. When working with refrigerants
k. With a vacuum still in the unit, the refrigerant charge you must comply with all local government envi-
may be drawn into the system from a refrigerant con- ronmental laws. In the U.S.A., refer to EPA sec-
tainer on weight scales. tion 608.
Procedure - Partial System a. Connect the gauge manifold to the compressor dis-
charge and suction service valves. For units operat-
a. If the refrigerant charge has been removed from the ing on a water cooled condenser, change over to air
compressor for service, evacuate only the compres- cooled operation.
sor by connecting the evacuation set--up at the com-
pressor service valves. (See Figure 6-5.) Follow b. Bring the container temperature to approximately
evacuation procedures of the preceding paragraph 1.7_C (35_F) or --17.8_C (0_F). Then set the control-
except leave compressor service valves frontseated ler set point to --25_C (--13_F) to ensure that the suc-
until evacuation is completed. tion modulation valve is fully open. (Position of the
suction modulating valve may be checked at control-
b. If refrigerant charge has been removed from the low ler function code Cd01.)
side only, evacuate the low side by connecting the c. Partially block the condenser coil inlet air. Increase
evacuation set--up at the compressor suction and the area blocked until the compressor discharge
economizer service valves and the liquid service pressure is raised to approximately 12 kg/cm@ (175
valve except leave the service valves frontseated un- psig).
til evacuation is completed.
d. On units equipped with a receiver, the level should be
c. Once evacuation has been completed and the pump between the glasses. On units equipped with a water
has been isolated, fully backseat the service valves to cooled condenser, the level should be at the center of
isolate the service connections and then continue the glass. If the refrigerant level is not correct, contin-
with checking and, if required, adding refrigerant in ue with the following paragraphs to add or remove re-
accordance with normal procedures frigerant as required.
T-320 6-4
Adding Refrigerant to System (Full Charge)
a. Evacuate unit and leave in deep vacuum. (Refer to
CAUTION
paragraph 6.3.4 .)
To prevent trapping liquid refrigerant in the
b. Place cylinder of R-134a on scale and connect charg- manifold gauge set be sure set is brought to
ing line from cylinder to liquid line valve. Purge charg- suction pressure before disconnecting.
ing line at liquid line valve and then note weight of cyl-
inder and refrigerant. 1. While the compressor is still ON, backseat the high
side service valve.
c. Open liquid valve on cylinder. Open liquid line valve
half-way and allow the liquid refrigerant to flow into 2. Midseat both hand valves on the manifold gauge set
the unit until the correct weight of refrigerant (refer to and allow the pressure in the manifold gauge set to
paragraph 2.2) has been added as indicated by be drawn down to low side pressure. This returns
scales. any liquid that may be in the high side hose to the
system.
NOTE 3. Backseat the low side service valve. Backseat both
field service couplings and frontseat both manifold
It may be necessary to finish charging unit hand valves. Remove the field service couplings
through suction service valve in gas form, due from the access valves.
to pressure rise in high side of the system. 4. Install both service valve stem caps and service port
caps (finger-tight only).
d. Backseat manual liquid line valve (to close off gauge 1 2 3
port). Close liquid valve on cylinder.
e. Start unit in cooling mode. Run approximately 10 min- 4
utes and check the refrigerant charge.
5
Adding Refrigerant to System (Partial Charge)
a. Examine the unit refrigerant system for any evidence 6
of leaks. Repair as necessary. (Refer to paragraph
6.3.3.)
b. Maintain the conditions outlined in paragraph 6.3.5.
c. Fully backseat the suction service valve and remove S D
the service port cap. 11
9
d. Connect charging line between suction service valve
port and cylinder of refrigerant R-134a. Open VAPOR
valve. 7
10
e. Partially frontseat (turn clockwise) the suction service
valve and slowly add charge until the refrigerant 8
appears at the proper level . Be careful not to front-
seat the suction valve fully, if the compressor is oper-
ated in a vacuum, internal damage may result. 1. Liquid Access Valve 6. Suction Access Valve
2. Receiver or Water 7. Vacuum Pump
6.4 REFRIGERATION SYSTEM SERVICE -- UNITS Cooled Condenser 8. Electronic Vacuum
WITH SEMI--HERMETIC PIPING (without Service
Valves) 3. Compressor Gauge
4. Discharge Service 9. Manifold Gauge Set
6.4.1 Service Connections Connection 10. Refrigerant Cylinder
The compressor is fitted with access valves at the 5. Economizer Access 11. Reclaimer
suction connection, economizer fitting and liquid line Valve
fitting to enable servicing of the system. Refrigerant
must be removed from system before performing Figure 6-6. Semi--Hermetic Piping Refrigeration
service. System Service Connections
To connect the manifold gauge/hose set for reading 6.4.2 Refrigerant Recovery
pressures, do the following: To remove the refrigerant for service, do the following:
1. Remove access valve cap. (See Figure 2--3) a. Connect the three access valves to the refrigerant
recovery unit as shown in Figure 6-6. Following the
2. Connect the field service coupling to the access refrigerant recovery unit manufacturers instructions,
valve. start the recovery process.
3. Turn the field service coupling knob clockwise, which b. To ensure complete removal of refrigerant, check that
will open the system to the gauge set. the suction modulating valve is more than 10% open
at controller function code Cd01. If required, the suc-
4. Repeat the procedure to connect the other side of tion modulating valve may be opened by use of con-
the gauge set. troller function code Cd41 valve override control.
6-5 T-320
c. Break the vacuum and bring the system to a slight Preparation
positive pressure using dry nitrogen. When refriger- Evacuate and dehydrate only after pressure leak test.
ant is fully recovered, remove the refrigerant recovery
unit. Essential tools to properly evacuate and dehydrate any
system include a vacuum pump (8 m3/hr = 5 cfm volume
d. Perform repairs as required and then leak test, evac- displacement) and an electronic vacuum gauge. (The
uate, charge and reseal unit in accordance with the pump is available from Carrier Transicold, P/N
following paragraphs. 07-00176-11.)
6.4.3 Refrigerant Leak Checking Additional time may be saved during a complete system
pump down by replaceing the filter-drier with a section of
copper tubing.
DANGER Procedure
Never use air for leak testing. It has been a. Remove all refrigerant using a refrigerant recovery
system. Refer to section 6.4.2.
determined that pressurized, air-rich mix-
tures of refrigerants and air can undergo b. The recommended method to evacuate and dehy-
combustion when exposed to an ignition drate the system is to connect evacuation hoses at
the liquid, economizer and suction access val-
source ves.(see Figure 6--6). Be sure the service hoses are
suited for evacuation purposes.
The recommended procedure for finding leaks in a c. The area between the suction modulating valve and
system is with a R-134a electronic leak detector. Testing evaporator expansion valve may not be open to the
joints with soapsuds is satisfactory only for locating access valves. To ensure evacuation of this area,
large leaks. check that the suction modulating valve is more than
10% open at controller function code Cd01. If re-
NOTE quired, the suction modulating valve may be opened
Only refrigerant 134a should be used to pres- by use of the controller function code Cd41 valve
surize the system. Any other gas or vapor will override control.
contaminate the system, which will require d. Test the evacuation setup for leaks and drawing a
additional purging and evacuation of the sys- deep vacuum with the vacuum pump and gauge
tem. valves open. Shut off the pump and check to see if the
vacuum holds. Repair leaks if necessary.
If the system is without refrigerant, charge with e. If possible, keep the ambient temperature above
refrigerant 134a to build up pressure between 2.1 to 3.5 15.6_C (60_F) to speed evaporation of moisture. If
kg/cm@ (30 to 50 psig). the ambient temperature is lower than 15.6_C
(60_F), ice might form before moisture removal is
To ensure complete pressurization of the system, complete. Heat lamps or alternate sources of heat
refrigerant should be charged at all of the access valves. may be used to raise the system temperature.
DO NOT charge liquid at the suction or economizer
fittings, charge only vapor. f. Open the vacuum pump and electronic vacuum
gauge valves, if they are not already open. Start the
Liquid may be charged at the liquid line. To ensure vacuum pump. Evacuate unit until the electronic vac-
pressure to this area, check that the suction modulating uum gauge indicates 2000 microns. Close the elec-
valve is more than 10% open at controller function code tronic vacuum gauge and vacuum pump valves. Shut
Cd01. The suction modulating valve may be opened by off the vacuum pump. Wait a few minutes to be sure
use of the controller function code Cd41 valve override the vacuum holds.
control (refer to paragraph 6.20).
g. Break the vacuum with clean dry refrigerant 134a
Remove refrigerant cylinder and leak-check all gas. Raise system pressure to approximately 0.2 kg/
connections. cm@ (2 psig), monitoring it with the compound gauge.
If required, remove refrigerant using a refrigerant h. Remove refrigerant using a refrigerant recovery sys-
recovery system and repair any leaks tem.
Evacuate, dehydrate and charge the unit in accordance i. Repeat steps f.and g. one time.
with the following paragraphs j. Remove the copper tubing and change the filter-drier.
6.4.4 Evacuation and Dehydration Evacuate unit to 500 microns. Close the electronic
vacuum gauge and vacuum pump valves. Shut off the
General vacuum pump. Wait five minutes to see if vacuum
The presence of moisture in a refrigeration system can holds. This procedure checks for residual moisture
have many undesirable effects. The most common are and/or leaks.
copper plating, acid sludge formation, “freezing-up” of k. With a vacuum still in the unit, the refrigerant charge
metering devices by free water, and formation of acids, may be drawn into the system from a refrigerant con-
resulting in metal corrosion. tainer on weight scales.
T-320 6-6
6.4.5 Refrigerant Charge 6.5 COMPRESSOR
Checking the Refrigerant Charge
WARNING
NOTE
To avoid damage to the earth’s ozone layer, use Make sure power to the unit is OFF and
a refrigerant recovery system whenever remov- power plug disconnected before replacing
ing refrigerant. When working with refrigerants the compressor.
you must comply with all local government envi-
ronmental laws. In the U.S.A., refer to EPA sec-
tion 608. WARNING
Before disassembly of the compressor
a. Connect the gauge manifold to the liquid and suction
access valves. For units operating on a water cooled make sure to relieve the internal pressure
condenser, change over to air cooled operation. very carefully by slightly loosening the cou-
plings to break the seal.
b. Bring the container temperature to approximately
--17.8_C (0_F). Then set the controller set point to
--25_C (--13_F) to ensure that the suction modulation
valve is fully open. Also, check function code Cd21. CAUTION
The economizer valve should be open. If ambient is
between 16_C (60_F) and 49_C (120_F), proceed to The scroll compressor achieves low suc-
step d. tion pressure very quickly. Do not use the
c. If ambient is below 16_C (60_F), partially block the compressor to evacuate the system below
condenser coil inlet air. Increase the area blocked zero psig. Never operate the compressor
until the compressor discharge pressure is raised to with the suction or discharge service valves
approximately 12 kg/cm@ (175 psig). closed (frontseated). Internal damage will
d. On units equipped with a receiver, the level should be result from operating the compressor in a
between the glasses. On units equipped with a water deep vacuum.
cooled condenser, the level should be at the center of
the glass. If the refrigerant level is not correct, contin- 6.5.1 Removal and Replacement of Compressor
ue with the following paragraphs to add or remove re- NOTE
frigerant as required.
Service compressor contains a nitrogen
6.4.6 Adding Refrigerant to System (Full Charge) charge. Due to the hygroscopic nature of the oil,
a. Evacuate unit and leave in deep vacuum. time the compressor is left open to the atmo-
sphere should be minimized as much as pos-
b. Place cylinder of R-134a on scale and connect charg- sible.
ing line from cylinder to liquid line valve. Purge charg-
ing line at liquid line valve and then note weight of cyl- a. Procure a replacement compressor kit. A list of items
inder and refrigerant. contained in the compressor kit is provided in
c. Open liquid valve on cylinder and allow the liquid Table 6-1.
refrigerant to flow into the unit until the correct amount b. If the unit is fitted with standard piping and the com-
of refrigerant has been added. pressor is operational, pump the unit down (refer to
paragraph 6.3.2). Skip to step e.
d. Close liquid valve on cylinder.
Table 6-1 Compressor Kit
e. Start unit in cooling mode. Run approximately 10 min- Item Component Qty
utes and check the refrigerant charge. 1 Compressor 1
f. On units equipped with a receiver, the level should be 2 Service Valve Seal 3
between the glasses. On units equipped with a water 3 Mylar Washers 4
cooled condenser, the level should be at the center of 4 Wire Tie 2
the glass. If the refrigerant level is not correct, go to
section 6.4.7. 5 Oil Sight Glass Plug 1
6 Resilient Mount 4
6.4.7 Adding Refrigerant to System (Partial
Charge) 7 Upper Shock Mount Ring 1
8 Upper Shock Mount Bushing 1
a. Examine the unit refrigerant system for any evidence 9 Compressor Power Plug O--Ring 1
of leaks. Repair as necessary.
10 SST Washers 8
b. Maintain the conditions outlined in paragraph 6.4.5. 11 Oil --Mobil 32ST (32 oz can) 2
c. Connect charging line between suction line and cylin- 12 Oil Charge Warning Tag 1
der of refrigerant R-134a. Open VAPOR valve. 13 Shrader valve/ valve body* 1
14 Mylar Protector 1
d. Slowly add charge until the liquid appears at the prop-
er level. * Shrader valve is not used on semi--hermetic units
6-7 T-320
c. If the unit is fitted with standard piping and the com-
pressor is not operational, turn the unit start--stop
switch (ST) and unit circuit breaker (CB--1) OFF. SST Washer
Evacuate the unit, refer to section 6.3.4 and skip to (Kit Item 10)
step e.
Resilient Mount
d. If the unit is fitted with semi--hermetic piping, turn the (Kit Item 6)
unit start--stop switch (ST) and unit circuit breaker
(CB--1) OFF. Evacuate the unit, refer to section 6.4.2
and skip to step f. SST Washer
(Kit Item 10)
e. Remove all remaining refrigerant from the compres-
sor using a refrigerant recovery system. Connect Mylar Washer
hoses to suction, economizer and discharge service (Kit Item 3)
connections. Evacuate compressor to 500 microns
(75.9 cm Hg vacuum = 29.9 inches Hg vacuum).
Mylar Protector
f. Make sure power to the unit is OFF and unit power (Retain)
plug disconnected. Disconnect the power plug from
the compressor. Base Plate
g. Loosen and break the seal at fittings from the suction, (Retain)
discharge, economizer, and the oil return service con- Mylar Protector
nections. Remove fittings and discard service valve (Retain)
seals, retain oil fitting O--ring.
NOTE
Use an oil catch can or basin to minimize spill-
age when removing the compressor oil drain Figure 6-8 Compressor Lower Mounting
port on units with semi--hermetic refrigerant cir- k. Remove the lower mounting bolts and hardware (see
cuits. Figure 6-8). Using plugs from replacement compres-
sor, plug connections on old compressor. Remove
the old compressor from the unit by tilting the top to
h. Remove the entire compressor upper mounting the right, and sliding the compressor base to the left
bracket assembly,(see Figure 6-7) by removing the until it is clear of the cross beam. Refer to paragraph
four cap screws attaching it to the unit and the 32--mm 2.2 for compressor weight. Return plugs to replace-
bolt from the compressor mounting bracket. ment compressor.
NOTE
Upper Shock Mount Schrader valve should be installed on the new
Bushing (Kit Item 8) compressor, ONLY if the old (removed) com-
Mylar Protector Upper Shock Mount Ring pressor was equipped with a Schrader valve.
(Kit Item 14 ) (Kit Item 7)
32mm Bolt l. The replacement compressor is shipped with an oil
charge of 591ml (20 ounces). Before sliding the new
compressor in the unit, remove the oil sight glass plug
and (using a small funnel) charge the compressor
with an additional 1893ml (64 ounces) Mobil 32ST
Shoulder Bolt (POE oil). Reassemble the oil sight glass plug to
9.5 mm avoid spilling oil when sliding the compressor in the
(0.375 in) unit.
m.Secure the base plate and mylar protectors to the
compressor with wire ties (kit item 4), and place the
compressor in the unit by tilting it to the right.
n. Cut and remove the wire ties that were used to hold
Figure 6-7 Compressor Upper Mounting the base plate and protectors to the compressor. Us-
ing new resilient mounts, SST washers and mylar
i. Replace the upper mounting bracket shock mount washers (kit items 3, 6 & 10). Install the four mounting
ring , mylar protector and bushing (kit items 7, 14 and screws loosely.
8). Reassemble the bracket in the same manner as
the original and torque the shoulder bolt to 2.8 mkg o. Install the male coupling (removed in step j.) into the
(20 ft--lbs.). sight glass port.
p. Place the new service seals (kit item 2) at the com-
j. Remove the male coupling from the top of the sight pressor service ports, connect the four service fittings
glass on the old compressor and hand assemble to loosely.
the oil return coupling for safe keeping. Plug the top of
the replacement compressor sight glass with the plug q. Torque the four resilient mount screws to 6.2 mkg (45
(kit item 5) to prevent spilling oil. ft--lbs).
T-320 6-8
r. Torque the four compressor fittings to: the sight glass. If it is not visible, oil must be added to
Service Valve Torque the compressor.
Suction or Discharge 11 to 13.8 mkg b. Adding Oil with Compressor in System -- Units
(80 to 100 ft--lbs.) with Standard Piping (with Service Valves)
Economizer 6.9 to 8.3 mkg 1. The recommended method is to add oil using an oil
(50 to 60 ft--lbs.) pump at the oil return service valve (see item 17,
Oil Return 1.4 to 1.66 mkg Figure 2-3)
(10 to 12 ft--lbs.)
2. In an emergency where an oil pump is not available,
s. Reassemble the top mounting bracket (see oil may be drawn into the compressor through the oil
Figure 6-7) by hand tightening the 32--mm (1¼ --inch) return service valve.
bolt and torquing the four mounting screws to 0.9
mkg (6.5 ft--lbs). Align the mounting so that the ring Connect the suction connection of the gauge man-
and bushing assembly are free with no compression. ifold to the compressor oil return valve port, and
immerse the common connection of the gauge man-
t. Torque the 32mm bolt to 1.5 mkg (11 ft--lbs.). While ifold in an open container of refrigeration oil. Extreme
maintaining the free movement of the shock mount, care must be taken to ensure the manifold common
torque the four mounting screws to 0.9 mkg (6.5 ft-- connection remains immersed in oil at all times.
lbs.). Otherwise air and moisture will be drawn into the
u. Replace the power plug O--Ring with new ring (kit compressor. Crack the oil return service valve and
item 9). Insert the power plug into the compressor fit- gauge valve to vent a small amount of refrigerant
ting. Be sure plug is fully seated into the fitting and through the common connection and the oil to purge
then thread the coupling nut a minimum of 5 turns. the lines of air. Close the gauge manifold valve.
v. Leak check and evacuate the compressor (or system With the unit running, turn the suction service valve
if unit is equipped with semi--hermetic piping) to 1000 toward frontseat and induce a vacuum in the com-
microns. pressor crankcase. Do not allow the compressor to
pull below 127mm/hg (5 “/hg). SLOWLY crack the
w. Run the unit for at least 15 minutes and check the oil suction gauge manifold valve and oil will flow through
and refrigerant levels. the oil return service valve into the compressor. Add
oil as necessary.
6.6 COMPRESSOR OIL LEVEL
3 Run unit for 20 minutes in cooling mode. Check oil
level at the compressor sight glass.
CAUTION c. Removing Oil from the Compressor -- Units with
Standard Piping (with Service Valves)
Use only Carrier Transicold approved 1 If the oil level is above the sight glass, oil must be
Polyol Ester Oil (POE) -- Mobil 32ST com- removed from the compressor.
pressor oil with R-134a. Buy in quantities of 2 Perform a compressor pump down.
one quart or smaller. When using this 3 Remove the oil plug, and drain oil until a level can be
hygroscopic oil, immediately reseal. Do not seen in the sight glass.
leave container of oil open or contamina- 4 Run unit for 20 minutes in cooling mode. Check oil
tion will occur. level at the compressor sight glass.
d. Adding Oil with Compressor in System -- Units
NOTE with Semi--Hermetic Piping (without Service
Use an oil catch can or basin to minimize spill- Valves)
age when removing the compressor oil drain 1. Remove refrigerant charge. Add oil using an oil
port on units with semi--hermetic refrigerant cir- pump at the suction connection.
cuits. 2. Leak check, evacuate and recharge system
a. Checking the Oil Level in the Compressor -- All 3. Run unit for 20 minutes and check oil level in the
Units sight glass.
1 Ideally, ambient temperature should be between e. Removing Oil from the Compressor -- Units with
4.4_C and 37.8_C (40_F and 100_F). Semi--Hermetic Piping (without Service Valves)
2 Operate the unit in cooling mode for at least 20 min- 1. If the oil level is above the sight glass, oil must be
utes. removed from the compressor.
3 Check the controller function code Cd1 for the suc- 2. Remove the refrigerant charge.
tion modulation valve (SMV) position. It should be at 3. Remove the oil plug, and drain oil until a level can be
least 20% open. seen in the sight glass. Evacuate and recharge unit.
4 Locate the oil sight glass on the side of the compres- 4. Run unit for 20 minutes in cooling mode. Check oil
sor (item 8, Figure 2-3, ). Oil level must be visible in level at the compressor sight glass.
6-9 T-320
6.7 HIGH PRESSURE SWITCH
1
4
6.7.1 Replacing High Pressure Switch -- Units with 1. Cylinder Valve
Standard Piping (with Service Valves) and Gauge
2 5 2. Pressure Regulator
a. Turn unit start-stop switch OFF. Frontseat the suc- 3. Nitrogen Cylinder
tion, discharge, economizer and oil return service 4. Pressure Gauge
valves to isolate compressor. Remove the refrigerant (0 to 36 kg/cm@ =
from the compressor.
3 0 to 400 psig)
6 5. Bleed-Off Valve
b. Disconnect wiring from defective switch. The high
pressure switch is located on the discharge service 6. 1/4 inch Connection
valve and is removed by turning counterclockwise.
(See Figure 2-3.)
Figure 6-9 High Pressure Switch Testing
c. Install a new high pressure switch after verifying d. Set nitrogen pressure regulator at 26.4 kg/cm@ (375
switch settings. (Refer to paragraph 6.7.3.) psig) with bleed-off valve closed.
d. Evacuate, dehydrate and recharge. e. Close valve on cylinder and open bleed-off valve.
f. Open cylinder valve. Slowly close bleed-off valve to
e. Start unit, verify refrigeration charge and oil level. increase pressure on switch. The switch should open
at a static pressure up to 25 kg/cm@ (350 psig). If a
6.7.2 Replacing High Pressure Switch -- Units with light is used, light will go out. If an ohmmeter is used,
Semi--Hermetic Piping (without Service the meter will indicate open circuit.
Valves)
g. Slowly open bleed-off valve to decrease the pres-
a. Remove the refrigerant charge. sure. The switch should close at 18 kg/cm@ (250
psig).
b. Disconnect wiring from defective switch. The high
pressure switch is located on the discharge connec- 6.8 CONDENSER COIL
tion or line and is removed by turning counterclock- The condenser consists of a series of parallel copper
wise. tubes expanded into copper fins. The condenser coil
must be cleaned with fresh water or steam so the air flow
c. Install a new high pressure switch after verifying is not restricted. To replace the coil, do the following:
switch settings.
d. Evacuate, dehydrate and recharge. WARNING

e. Start unit, verify refrigeration charge and oil level.
Do not open the condenser fan grille before
6.7.3 Checking High Pressure Switch turning power OFF and disconnecting
power plug.
a. Using a refrigerant reclaim system, remove the refrig-

WARNING erant charge.
b. Remove the condenser coil guard.
Do not use a nitrogen cylinder without a c. Unsolder discharge line and remove the line to the
pressure regulator. Do not use oxygen in or receiver or water-cooled condenser.
near a refrigeration system as an explosion d. Remove coil mounting hardware and remove the coil.
may occur. e. Install replacement coil and solder connections.
f. Leak-check the coil connections per paragraph para-
graph6.3.3 for standard piping and 6.4.3 for smi--her-
NOTE metic piping. Evacuate the unit then charge the unit
with refrigerant.
The high pressure switch is non-adjustable.
6.9 CONDENSER FAN AND MOTOR ASSEMBLY
a. Remove switch as outlined in paragraphs 6.7.1 or

6.7.2 WARNING
b. Connect ohmmeter or continuity light across switch
terminals. Ohm meter will indicate no resistance or Do not open condenser fan grille before
continuity light will be illuminated if the switch closed turning power OFF and disconnecting
after relieving compressor pressure. power plug.
c. Connect hose to a cylinder of dry nitrogen. (See The condenser fan rotates counter-clockwise (viewed
Figure 6-9.) from front of unit), pulls air through the the condenser
T-320 6-10
coil, and discharges horizontally through the front of the cap on water-cooled condenser inlet tube (replaces
unit. To replace motor assembly: tubing flare nut). De-scale tubing if necessary.
a. Open condenser fan screen guard. What You Will Need:
b. Loosen two square head set screws on fan. (Thread 1. Oakite composition No. 22, available as a powder in
sealer has been applied to set screws at installation.) 68 kg (150 lb) and 136 kg (300 lb) containers.
Disconnect wiring from motor junction box.
2. Oakite composition No. 32, available as a liquid in
cases, each containing 3.785 liters (4 U.S. gallon)
bottles and also in carboys of 52.6 kg (116 lbs) net.
CAUTION
3. Fresh clean water.
Take necessary steps (place plywood over 4. Acid proof pump and containers or bottles with rub-
coil or use sling on motor) to prevent motor ber hose.
from falling into condenser coil.
NOTE
c. Remove motor mounting hardware and replace the When Oakite compound No. 32 is being used
motor. It is recommended that new locknuts be used for the first time, the local Oakite Technical Ser-
when replacing motor. Connect wiring per wiring dia- vice representative should be called in for their
gram.
suggestions in planning the procedure. They
d. Install fan loosely on motor shaft (hub side in). DO will advise the reader on how to do the work with
NOT USE FORCE. If necessary, tap the hub only, not a minimum dismantling of equipment: how to
the hub nuts or bolts. Install venturi. Apply “Loctite H” estimate the time and amount of compound
to fan set screws. Adjust fan within venturi so that the
outer edge of the fan is within 2.0 ± .07 mm (0.08” ¦ required; how to prepare the solution; how to
0.03”) from the outside of the orifice opening. Spin fan control and conclude the de-scaling operation
by hand to check clearance. by rinsing and neutralizing equipment before
e. Close and secure condenser fan screen guard. putting it back into service. Their knowledge of
metals, types of scale, water conditions and de-
f. Apply power to unit and check fan rotation. If fan scaling techniques will be highly useful .
motor rotates backward, reverse wire numbers 5 and
8.
Summary of Procedure:
6.10 WATER COOLED CONDENSER CLEANING a. Drain water from condenser tubing circuit. Clean
water tubes with Oakite No. 22 to remove mud and
The water-cooled condenser is of the shell and coil type slime.
with water circulating through the cupro-nickel coil. The
refrigerant vapor is admitted to the shell side and is b. Flush.
condensed on the outer surface of the coil.
c. De-scale water tubes with Oakite No. 32 to remove
Rust, scale and slime on the water-cooling surfaces scale.
inside of the coil interfere with the transfer of heat,
reduce system capacity, cause higher head pressures d. Flush.
and increase the load on the system. e. Neutralize.
By checking the leaving water temperature and the f. Flush.
actual condensing temperature, it can be determined if
the condenser coil is becoming dirty. A larger than g. Put unit back in service under normal load and check
normal difference between leaving condensing water head (discharge) pressure.
temperature and actual condensing temperature,
coupled with a small difference in temperature of Detailed Procedure:
entering and leaving condensing water, is an indication 1. Drain and flush the water circuit of the condenser
of a dirty condensing coil. coil. If scale on the tube inner surfaces is accompa-
To find the approximate condensing temperature, with nied by slime, a thorough cleaning is necessary
the unit running in the cooling mode, install a gauge 0 to before de-scaling process can be accomplished.
36.2 kg/cm@ (0 to 500 psig) on the compressor 2. To remove slime or mud, use Oakite composition No.
discharge service valve. 22. Mixed 170 grams (6 ounces) per 3.785 liters (1
Example: Discharge pressure is 10.3 kg/cm@ (146.4 U.S. gallon) of water. Warm this solution and circu-
psig). Referring to Table 6-7 (R-134a pressure/ late through the tubes until all slime and mud has
temperature chart), the 10.3 kg/cm@ (146.4 psig) value been removed.
converts to 43_C (110_F). 3. After cleaning, flush tubes thoroughly with fresh
If the water-cooled condenser is dirty, it may be cleaned clean water.
and de-scaled by the following procedure: 4. Prepare a 15% by volume solution for de-scaling, by
a. Turn unit off and disconnect main power. diluting Oakite compound No. 32 with water. This is
accomplished by slowly adding 0.47 liter (1 U.S. pint)
b. Disconnect water pressure switch tubing by loosen- of the acid (Oakite No. 32) to 2.8 liters (3 U.S. quarts)
ing the two flare nuts. Install one-quarter inch flare of water.
6-11 T-320
WARNING
Fill condenser with clean-
Oakite No. 32 is an acid. Be sure that the ing solution. Do not add
acid is slowly added to the water. DO NOT solution more rapidly than
PUT WATER INTO THE ACID -- this will vent can exhaust gases
caused by chemical
cause spattering and excessive heat. action.
1” Pipe
WARNING 5’ Approximate
Wear rubber gloves and wash the solution Vent

from the skin immediately if accidental con- pipe
tact occurs. Do not allow the solution to
splash onto concrete.
3’ to 4’
5. Fill the tubes with this solution by filling from the bot-
tom. See Figure 6-10. Important: be sure to provide Condenser
a vent at the top for escaping gas.
Vent
Centrifugal pump Figure 6-11 Water Cooled Condenser Cleaning -
30 GPM at 35’ head Close vent pipe
Globe valve when pump Gravity Circulation
Priming valves is running. 8 When de-scaling is complete, drain the solution and
connection flush thoroughly with water.
Pump
9 Following the water flush, circulate a 56.7 gram (2
Suction ounce) per 3.785 liter (1 U.S. gallon) solution of
Condenser Oakite No. 22 thru the tubes to neutralize. Drain this
Tank solution.
10 Flush the tubes thoroughly with fresh water.
Remove water
regulating valve NOTE
If the condenser cooling water is not being used
Return
as drinking water or is not re-circulated in a
Pump Fine mesh closed or tower system, neutralizing is not nec-
support screen essary.
11 Put the unit back in service and operate under nor-
Figure 6-10 Water-Cooled Condenser Cleaning -- mal load. Check the head pressure. If normal, a thor-
Forced Circulation ough de-scaling has been achieved.
6 Allow the Oakite No. 32 solution to soak in the tube What You Can Do For Further Help:
coils for several hours, periodically pump-circulating Contact the Engineering and Service Department of the
it with an acid-proof pump. OAKITE PRODUCTS CO., 19 Rector Street, New York,
NY 10006 U.S.A. for the name and address of the
An alternate method may be used whereby a pail service representative in your area.
(see Figure 6-11) filled with the solution and
attached to the coils by a hose can serve the same 6.11 FILTER-DRIER
purpose by filling and draining. The solution must
contact the scale at every point for thorough de-scal- On units equipped with a water-cooled condenser, if the
ing. Air pockets in the solution should be avoided by sight glass appears to be flashing or bubbles are
regularly opening the vent to release gas. Keep constantly moving through the sight glass when the
flames away from the vent gases. suction modulation valve is fully open, the unit may have
a low refrigerant charge or the filter-drier could be
7 The time required for de-scaling will vary, depending partially plugged.
upon the extent of the deposits. One way to deter- a. To Check Filter-Drier
mine when de-scaling has been completed is to
titrate the solution periodically, using titrating equip- 1. Test for a restricted or plugged filter-drier by feeling
ment provided free by the Oakite Technical Service the liquid line inlet and outlet connections of the drier
representative. As scale is being dissolved, titrate cartridge. If the outlet side feels cooler than the inlet
readings will indicate that the Oakite No. 32 solution side, then the filter-drier should be changed.
is losing strength. When the reading remains 2. Check the moisture-liquid indicator if the indicator
constant for a reasonable time, this is an indication shows a high level of moisture, the filter-drier should
that scale has been dissolved. be replaced.
T-320 6-12
b. To Replace Filter-Drier 6.12.1 Checking Superheat.
1. Pump down the unit (refer to paragraph 6.3.2). Eva-
cuate if unit is not equipped with service valves (Re-
fer to paragraph 6.4.4). Then replace filter-drier. NOTE
2. Evacuate the low side in accordance with paragraph Proper superheat measurement for the evapo-
6.3.4.
rator expansion valve should be completed at
3. After unit is in operation, inspect for moisture in sys- --18_C (0_F) container box temperature where
tem and check charge. possible. If the economizer or quench valve is
6.12 EXPANSION VALVES suspect, it should be replaced.
Three expansion valves are used, the evaporator

expansion valve (item 11, Figure 2-2), the quench
expansion valve (item 13, Figure 2-2) and the a. Open the heater access panel (see Figure 2-1) to ex-
economizer expansion valve (item 26, Figure 2-4). The pose the evaporator expansion valve.
expansion valves are automatic devices which maintain
constant superheat of the refrigerant gas leaving at the b. Attach a temperature sensor near the expansion
point of bulb attachment regardless of suction pressure. valve bulb and insulate. Make sure the suction line is
The valve functions are: clean and that firm contact is made with the sensor.
1. Automatic control of the refrigerant flow to match the
load. c. Connect an accurate gauge to the service port direct-
ly upstream of the suction modulating valve.
2. Prevention of liquid refrigerant entering the com-
pressor.
d. Set the temperature set point to --18_C (0_F), and run
Unless the valve is defective, it seldom requires unit until conditions stabilize.
maintenance other than periodic inspection to ensure
that the thermal bulb is tightly secured to the suction line
and wrapped with insulating compound. (See e. The readings may cycle from a high to a low reading.
Figure 6-12.) Take readings of temperature and pressure every
three to five minutes for a total of 5 or 6 readings
1. Suction Line
f. From the temperature/pressure chart (Table 6-7), de-
3 2. TXV Bulb Clamp termine the saturation temperature corresponding to
3. Nut and Bolt the evaporator outlet test pressures at the suction
4. TXV Bulb modulation valve.
2
4 g. Subtract the saturation temperatures determined in
1 step f. from the temperatures measured in step e..
The difference is the superheat of the suction gas.
Determine the average superheat It should be 4.5 to
Figure 6-12 Thermostatic Expansion Valve Bulb 6.7 °C (8 to 12°F)
Braze Rod
Copper Tube (’Sil-Phos” = 5.5% Silver, 6% Phosphorus)
(Apply heat for
10-15 seconds)
Bi-metallic Tube Connection

(Apply heat for 2-5 seconds) Use of a wet cloth is not neces-
sary due to rapid heat dissipation
of the bi--metallic connections
Figure 6-13 Hermetic Thermostatic Expansion Valve Brazing Procedure
6-13 T-320
6.12.2 Valve Replacement 1. Clean the suction line with sandpaper before instal-
ling bulb to ensure proper heat transfer. Apply ther-
a. Removing the Expansion Valve mal grease to the indentation in the suction line.
NOTES 2. Strap the thermal bulb to the suction line, making
sure bulb is placed firmly into the suction line. See
1. The TXV’s are hermetic valves and do not Figure 6-12 for bulb placement.
have adjustable superheat. 3. Insulate the thermal bulb.
2. All connections on the evaporator TXV are 4. The economizer and quench valves should be
bi--metallic, copper on the inside and wrapped in a soaked cloth for brazing. For the evap-
stainless on the outside. When brazing, orator valve, see Figure 6-13. Braze inlet connection
to inlet line
bi--metallic connections heat up very
quickly. 5. Braze outlet connection to outlet line.
6. Reinstall the cushion clamps on inlet and outlet lines.
7. If applicable, braze the equalizer connection to the
equalizer line.
6 8. Check superheat (refer to step 6.12.1).
1 6.13 EVAPORATOR COIL AND HEATER
ASSEMBLY
2 The evaporator section, including the coil, should be
5 cleaned regularly. The preferred cleaning fluid is fresh
3 water or steam. Another recommended cleaner is
Oakite 202 or similar, following manufacturer’s
4 instructions.
The two drain pan hoses are routed behind the
1. Evaporator Expansion Valve condenser fan motor and compressor. The drain pan
2. Non-adjustable Superheat Stem line(s) must be open to ensure adequate drainage.
3. Equalizer Connection
4. Inlet Connection 6.13.1 Evaporator Coil Replacement
5. Outlet Connection a. Pump unit down. (Refer to paragraph 6.3.2.) Evacua-
6. Expansion Valve Bulb te if unit is not equipped with service valves. Refer to
Figure 6-14 Evaporator Expansion Valve paragraph 6.4.3.
b. With power OFF and power plug removed, remove
the screws securing the panel covering the evapora-
tor section (upper panel).
c. Disconnect the defrost heater wiring.
INLET d. Disconnect the defrost temperature sensor (see Fig-
ure Figure 2-2 from the coil. .
e. Remove middle coil support.
f. Remove the mounting hardware from the coil.
g. Unsolder the two coil connections, one at the distribu-
OUTLET tor and the other at the coil header.
h. After defective coil is removed from unit, remove
defrost heaters and install on replacement coil.
Figure 6-15 Quench & Economizer Expansion i. Install coil assembly by reversing above steps.
Valves
j. Leak check connections. Evacuate and add refriger-
1. Pump down the unit per paragraph 6.3.2. Evacuate if ant charge.
unit is not equipped with service valves. Refer to
paragraph 6.4.4. 6.13.2 Evaporator Heater Replacement
2. Remove cushion clamps located on the inlet and out- a.Before servicing unit, make sure the unit circuit break-
let lines. ers (CB-1 & CB-2) and the start-stop switch (ST) are
in the OFF position, and that the power plug and cable
3. Unbraze the equalizer connection (if applicable), the are disconnected.
outlet connection and then the inlet connection.
b. Remove the lower access panel (Figure 2-1) by
4. Remove insulation (Presstite) from expansion valve removing the T.I.R. locking device lockwire and
bulb. mounting screws.
5. Unstrap the bulb, located below the center of the c. Determine which heater(s) need replacing by check-
suction line (4 o’clock position), and remove the ing resistance on each heater. Refer to paragraph 2.3
valve. for heater resistance values
b. Installing the Expansion Valve d. Remove hold-down clamp securing heaters to coil.
T-320 6-14
e. Lift the bent end of the heater (with the opposite end
down and away from coil). Move heater to the side 1
enough to clear the heater end support and remove.
2
6.14 ECONOMIZER, UNLOADER AND OIl 3
RETURN SOLENOID VALVE
a. Replacing the Coil
NOTE 4
The coil may be replaced without removing the
refrigerant. 5
1 Be sure electrical power is removed from the unit.

Disconnect leads. Remove top screw and washer. 6
Lift off coil. (See Figure 6-16 or Figure 6-17)
7
2 Verify coil type, voltage and frequency of old and new
coil. This information appears on the coil housing.
8
b. Replacing Valve Internal Parts (Unloader
Solenoid Only) 9
1 Pump down the unit. Refer to paragraph 6.3.2. Eva-
cuate if unit is not equipped with service valves. Re-
fer to paragraph 6.4.4.
2 Be sure electrical power is removed from the unit. 1. Top Screw 6. Gasket
Disconnect leads. Remove top screw and washer.
Lift off coil. (See Figure 6-16) 2. Washer 7. Stem and Plunger
3. Coil 8. Seat Disc
3 Remove the top screw (see Figure 6-16), washer , 4. Locknut 9. Body
and coil assembly.
5. Enclosing Tube
4 Loosen the enclosing tube locknut.
5 Remove enclosing tube and locknut assembly. The Figure 6-16. Unloader Solenoid Valve
gasket is inside the enclosing tube.
6 Remove seat disc from inside of body and check for 1
obstructions and foreign material.
2
7 Place the seat disc into the valve body with the small-
er diameter end facing up. 3
8 Install stem and plunger.
9 Place the enclosing tube locknut over the enclosing
tube. Install spacer over enclosing tube making sure
it is seated properly in the enclosing tube locknut.
Tighten enclosing tube locknut to a torque value of 4
2.78 mkg (20 ft-lb). Do not overtighten.
10 Install coil assembly, washer and top screw.
11 Evacuate and dehydrate the system. Charge unit
with refrigerant per section 6.3.5 for standard piping
and 6.4.5 for semi--hermetic piping . 1. Slotted Screw
12 Start unit and check operation. 2. Washer
c. Replacing Valve 3. Coil
4. Enclosing Tube and Body
1 To replace the unloader or economizer valve, pump
down the unit. Refer to paragraph 6.3.2. Evacuate if Figure 6-17. Oil Return Solenoid Valve (ORV) and
unit is not equipped with service valves. Refer to Economizer Solenoid Valve (ESV)
paragraph 6.4.4.To replace the oil return valve, re-
move the refrigerant charge.
6.15 EVAPORATOR FAN AND MOTOR ASSEMBLY
2 Be sure electrical power is removed from the unit.
Disconnect leads. Remove top screw and washer. The evaporator fans circulate air throughout the
Lift off coil. (See Figure 6-16 or Figure 6-17) container by pulling air in the top of the unit. The air is
3 Unbraze valve from unit and braze new valve in forced through the evaporator coil where it is either
place heated or cooled and then discharged out the bottom of
the refrigeration unit into the container. The fan motor
4 Install coil. Evacuate low side and place unit back in bearings are factory lubricated and do not require
operation. Check charge additional grease.
6-15 T-320
6.15.1 Replacing The Evaporator Fan Assembly mkg (70 inch-pounds) Apply power momentarily to
check for proper fan rotation (refer to paragraph 2.3).
If fan spins backward, then motor wiring or motor is
defective.
WARNING
f. Replace access panel making sure that panel does
not leak. Make sure that the T.I.R. locking device is
Always turn OFF the unit circuit breakers lockwired.
(CB-1 & CB-2) and disconnect main power
supply before working on moving parts.
4 5
a. Remove upper access panel (see Figure 2-2) by
removing mounting bolts and T.I.R. locking device.
Reach inside of unit and remove the Ty-Rap securing
the wire harness loop. Then unplug the connector by 6
twisting to unlock and pulling to separate. 3
b. Loosen four 1/4-20 clamp bolts that are located on the 2 5
underside of the fan deck at the sides of the of the fan
assembly. Slide the loosened clamps back from the 1
fan assembly.
c. Slide the fan assembly out from the unit and place on
a sturdy work surface.
6.15.2 Disassemble The Evaporator Fan Assembly
a. Attach a spanner wrench to the two 1/4-20 holes
located in the fan hub. Loosen the 5/8-18 shaft nut by
holding the spanner wrench stationary and turning 7
the 5/8-18 nut counter-clockwise (see Figure 6-18).
8
NOTE
When removing the black nylon evaporator fan
blade, care must be taken to assure that the 9
blade is not damaged. In the past, it was a com-
mon practice to insert a screwdriver between
the fan blades to keep it from turning. This prac-
tice can no longer be used, as the blade is made
up of a material that will damage. It is recom- 1. Stator 6. Impeller Fan
mended that an impact wrench be used when 2. Flat washer, 1/4 7. Key
removing the blade. Do not use the impact 3. Bolt, 1/4-20 x 3/4 8. Mylar Protector
wrench when reinstalling, as galling of the stain- 4. Locknut, 5/8-18 9. Evaporator Motor
less steel shaft can occur 5. Flat washer, 5/8
Figure 6-18. Evaporator Fan Assembly
b. Remove the spanner wrench. Use a universal wheel
puller and remove the fan from the shaft. Remove the 6.16 EVAPORATOR FAN MOTOR CAPACITORS
washers and key.
The evaporator fan motors are of the permanent-split
c. Remove the four 1/4-20 x 3/4 long bolts that are capacitor type. The motor is equipped with one
located under the fan that support the motor and sta- capacitor used in the high speed circuit and another
tor housing. Remove the motor and plastic spacer. capacitor used for the low speed circuit.
6.15.3 Assemble The Evaporator Fan Assembly
6.16.1 When To Check For A Defective Capacitor
a. Assemble the motor and plastic spacer onto the sta-
tor. a. Fan motor will not change speed. For example: in the
conventional perishable mode, the motors should run
b. Apply loctite to the 1/4-20 x 3/4 long bolts and torque in high speed. In the economy perishable mode they
to 0.81 mkg (70 inch-pounds). should switch speeds and in the frozen mode, the mo-
tors should run in low speed.
c. Place one 5/8 flat washer on the shoulder of the fan
motor shaft. Insert the key in the keyway and lubricate
the fan motor shaft and threads with a graphite-oil NOTE
solution (such as Never-seez). The evaporator fan motors will always start in
d. Install the fan onto the motor shaft. Place one 5/8 flat high speed.
washer with a 5/8-18 locknut onto the motor shaft and
torque to 40 foot-pounds. b. Motor running in wrong direction (after checking for
correct wiring application).
e. Install the evaporator fan assembly in reverse order
of removal. Torque the four 1/4-20 clamp bolts to 0.81 c. Motor will not start, and IP-EM’s are not open.
T-320 6-16
6.16.2 Removing The Capacitor A fourth selection is also provided to enter a time period
of up to three minutes, during which the override(s) are
active. If the timer is active, valve override selections will
WARNING take place immediately. If the timer is not active,
changes will not take place for a few seconds after the
timer is started. When the timer times out, override
Make sure power to the unit is OFF and function is automatically terminated and the valves
power plug disconnected before removing return to normal machinery control. To operate the
capacitor(s). override, do the following:
The capacitors are located on the motor and above the a. Press the CODE SELECT key then press an AR-
evaporator fan deck they may be removed by two ROW key until Cd41 is displayed in the left window.
methods: The right window will display a controller communica-
tions code.
1 If container is empty, open upper rear panel of the
unit. The capacitor may be serviced after discon-
necting power plug. b. Press the ENTER key. The left display will show a test
name alternating with the test setting or time remain-
2 If container is full, turn the unit power OFF and dis- ing. Use an ARROW key to scroll to the desired test.
connect power plug. Remove the evaporator fan Press the ENTER key and SELCt will appear in the
motor access panel. (See Figure 2-1). For removal left display.
of the evaporator fan assembly, refer to section 6.15.
c. Use an ARROW key to scroll to the desired setting,
and then press the ENTER key. Selections available
WARNING for each of the tests are provided in the following
table.
With power OFF discharge the capacitor d. If the timer is not operating, follow the above proce-
before disconnecting the circuit wiring. dure to display the timer. Use an ARROW key to scroll
to the desired time interval and press ENTER to start
6.16.3 Checking The Capacitor the timer.
If the capacitor is suspected of malfunction, you may
choose to simply replace it. Direct replacement requires e. The above described sequence may be repeated
a capacitor of the same value. Two methods for during the timer cycle to change to another override.
checking capacitor function are: Right Display Available Selections
1. Volt-ohmmeter set on RX 10,000 ohms. CAP AUtO
((Capacity
p y Mode)) (Normal Control)
Connect ohmmeter leads across the capacitor
terminals and observe the meter needle. If the capacitor UnLd
is good, the needle will make a rapid swing toward zero (Unloader = Open
resistance and then gradually swing back toward a very Economizer = Closed)
high resistance reading. Std
(Unloader = closed
If the capacitor has failed open, the ohmmeter needle Economizer = closed)
will not move when the meter probes touch the
terminals. If the capacitor is shorted, the needle will ECOn
swing to zero resistance position and stay there. (Unloader = closed
Economizer = open)
2. Capacitor analyzer:
SM AUtO
The function of the analyzer is to read the microfarad (SMV % Setting) (Normal Control)
value of a capacitor and to detect insulation breakdown 3
under load conditions. The important advantages of a 4
analyzer are its ability to locate capacitors that have 6
failed to hold their microfarad ratings, or those that are 12
breaking down internally during operation. It is also 25
useful in identifying capacitors when their microfarad 50
rating marks have become unreadable. 100
6.17 VALVE OVERRIDE CONTROLS OIL AUto
( Valve Setting)
(Oil g) (Normal Control)
Controller function code Cd41 is a configurable code CLOSE
that allows timed operation of the automatic valves for OPEn
troubleshooting. Three test sequences are provided.
The first, capacity mode (CAP), allows alignment of the LIV AUto
unloader and economizer solenoid valves in the ((Liquid
q g,
Valve Setting, (Normal Control)
standard, unloaded and economized operating if applicable)
li bl ) CLOSE
configurations. The second, SMV % Setting (SM) OPEn
allows opening of the suction modulating valve to
various percentages and the third, Oil Valve Setting tIM 0 00 (0 minutes/0 Seconds)
(OIL) allows opening or closing of the oil return solenoid (Timer) In 30 second increments to
valve. 3 00 (3 minutes/ 0 seconds)
6-17 T-320
6.18 SUCTION MODULATION VALVE To check operation:
On start up of the unit, the valve will reset to a known
open position. This is accomplished by assuming the 1. Stop the unit, disconnect the four pin connector from
valve was fully open, driving it fully closed, resetting the the stepper module to the valve and attach the
percentage open to zero, then opening to a known 10% SMA-12 stepper drive to the connector going to the
staging position. valve.
2. Set the SMA-12 pulse per second (PPS) to one PPS

and either open or close valve. Each LED should
FROM COIL light sequentially until all four are lit. Any LED failing
2-1/8 inch Nut
to light indicates an open on that leg which indicates
a poor connection or an open coil. Repair or replace
as required to achieve proper operation.
TO COMPRESSOR
FROM UNLOADER/QUENCH
CAUTION
Figure 6-19 Suction Modulation Valve (SMV)
6.18.1 Precheck Procedure The scroll compressor achieves low suc-
a. Check unit for abnormal operation. tion pressure very quickly. Do not operate
b. Check charge. If refrigerant is low repair as required the compressor in a deep vacuum, internal
and again check operation. damage will result.
c. If sufficient capacity cannot be maintained or unit is
tripping excessively on high pressure switch (HPS) in
high ambients, check coils and clean if required. 3. Restart unit, set the step rate to 200 PPS on SMA-12
d. If capacity or control cannot be maintained turn unit for the valve, and close stepper valve while watching
OFF, then back ON. This will reset the valve in the the suction gauge. Within one minute the suction
event the controller lost communication with the pressure will go into a vacuum. This is an indication
valve, and may correct the problem. that the valve is moving.
NOTE 4. If no change in suction pressure is detected, check

Carefully listen to the valve. During reset, the for resistance (refer to step 6.18.2), and check con-
valve will make a ratcheting noise that may be nections for proper continuity and retest. If the valve
heard or felt as it is attempting to close. If this is functioning and all connections and motor resist-
can be heard or felt, it indicates that the control- ance are good, check the controller .
ler and drive module are attempting to close the
valve, and may serve as a quick indication that
the drive is in working order.
e. Operation of the valve may be checked using the con-

CAUTION
troller valve override program, function code Cd41.
Refer to paragraph 6.17 for valve override test in- DO NOT disassemble piston from NEW suc-
structions. tion modulating valve powerhead assem-
6.18.2 Checking The Stepper valve bly. Doing so may result in damage to pis-
a. Checking with ohmmeter ton.
Disconnect the four pin connector to the stepper SMV.
With a reliable digital ohmmeter, check the winding
resistance. In normal ambient, the valve should have 72 5. If the valve is determined as faulty after completing
to 84 ohms measured on the red/green (a-b terminals) the above steps, perform a low side pump down
and on the white/black (c-d terminals) leads. If an infinite (units with standard piping) or remove charge (units
or zero reading occurs, check connections and replace with semi--hermetic piping).
the motor. Remove valve powerhead assembly, and replace
b. Checking with SMA-12 portable stepper drive tester with a NEW valve powerhead assembly, torque nut
to 35 ft-lb.
The SMA-12 portable stepper drive tester (Carrier For units with standard piping: Evacuate low side,
Transicold P/N 07-00375-00) is a battery operated open all service valves and leak test unit.
stepper drive which will open and close the SMV, allows For Units with semi--hermetic piping: Leak test unit,
a more thorough check of the operating mechanism. evacuate, dehydrate and recharge.
T-320 6-18
6.19 AUTOTRANSFORMER 1 2 3
If the unit does not start, check the following:

a. Make sure the 460 vac (yellow) power cable is
plugged into the receptacle (item 3, Figure 4-1) and
locked in place.
b. Make sure that circuit breakers CB-1 and CB-2 are in
the “ON” position. If the circuit breakers do not hold in, 4
check voltage supply.
c. There is no internal protector for this transformer
design, therefore, no checking of the internal protec-
tor is required.
d. Using a voltmeter, and with the primary supply circuit
ON, check the primary (input) voltage (460 vac).
Next, check the secondary (output) voltage (230
vac). The transformer is defective if output voltage is
not available.
1. Controller Software Programming Port
6.20 CONTROLLER 2. Mounting Screw
3. Controller
6.20.1 Handling Modules 4. Test Points
Figure 6-20 Controller Section of the Control Box
CAUTION 6.20.2 Controller Trouble-Shooting
A group of test points (TP, see Figure 6-20) are provided
Do not remove wire harnesses from module on the controller for trouble-shooting electrical circuits
unless you are grounded to the unit frame (see schematic diagram, section 7). A description of the
with a static safe wrist strap. test points follows:
NOTE
CAUTION Use a digital voltmeter to measure ac voltage
between TP’s and ground (TP9), except for
Unplug all module connectors before per- TP8.
forming arc welding on any part of the con-
tainer. TP1
This test point enables the user to check if the controller
The guidelines and cautions provided herein should be unloader solenoid valve relay (TU) is open or closed.
followed when handling the modules. These TP2
precautions and procedures should be implemented
when replacing a module, when doing any arc welding This test point enables the user to check if the high
on the unit, or when service to the refrigeration unit pressure switch (HPS) is open or closed.
requires handling and removal of a module.
TP3
a. Obtain a grounding wrist strap (Carrier Transicold This test point enables the user to check if the water
part number 07--00--304--00)and a static dissipation pressure switch (WP) contact is open or closed.
mat (Carrier Transicold part number 07--00304--00.
The wrist strap, when properly grounded, will dissi- TP 4
pate any potential buildup on the body. The dissipa- This test point enables the user to check if the internal
tion mat will provide a static-free work surface on protector for the condenser fan motor(IP-CM) is open or
which to place and/or service the modules. closed.
b. Disconnect and secure power to the unit. TP 5
c. Place strap on wrist and attach the ground end to any This test point enables the user to check if the internal
exposed unpainted metal area on the refrigeration protectors for the evaporator fan motors (IP-EM1 or
unit frame (bolts, screws, etc.). IP-EM2) are open or closed.
TP 6
d. Carefully remove the module. Do not touch any of the
electrical connections if possible. Place the module This test point is not used in this application.
on the static mat. TP 7
e. The strap should be worn during any service work on This test point enables the user to check if the controller
a module, even when it is placed on the mat. economizer solenoid valve relay (TS) is open or closed
6-19 T-320
TP 8 When complete the controller will reset and power up
normally.
This test point enables the user to check power to the
suction modulator valve. 12 Wait for default display, setpoint on the left, and con-
trol temperature on the right.
TP 9
13.Confirm software is correct using keypad code se-
This test point is the chassis (unit frame) ground lect 18 to view Cd18 XXXX
connection.
14.Turn power off. Operational Software is loaded
TP 10
b. Procedure for loading Configuration Software
This test point enables the user to check if the heat 1. Turn unit OFF using start-stop switch (ST).
termination thermostat (HTT) contact is open or closed.
2. Insert software/programming PCMCIA card contain-
6.20.3 Controller Programming Procedure ing the following (example) files into the program-
To load new software into the module, the programming ming/software port. (See Figure 6-20):
card is inserted into the programming/software port. menuDDMM.ml3, this file allows the user to select
the file/program to upload into the controller.
cfYYMMDD.ml3, multi--configuration file
CAUTION recp54XX.ml3, controller software program for recip
The unit must be OFF whenever a program- units.
ming card is inserted or removed from the 3. Turn unit ON using start-stop switch (ST).
controller programming port. 4. The Display module will display the message ruN
COnFG. (If a defective card is being used the Dis-
a. Procedure for loading Operational Software play will blink the message “bAd CArd”. Turn start-
stop switch OFF and remove the card.)
1. Turn unit OFF, via start-stop switch (ST).
5. Press the ENTER key on the keypad.
2. Insert software/programming PCMCIA card contain-
ing the following (example) files into the program- 6. The Display module will go blank briefly and then dis-
ming/software port. (See Figure 6-20): play “551 00”. Based on the operational software
installed.
menuDDMM.ml3, this file allows the user to select a 7. Press the UP or DOWN ARROW key to scroll
file/program to upload into the controller. through the list to obtain the proper model dash num-
cfYYMMDD.ml3, multi--configuration file ber. (If a defective card is being used, the Display will
blink the message “bAd CArd”. Turn start-stop
3. Turn unit ON, via start-stop switch (ST). switch OFF and remove the card.)
4. The Display module will display the message ruN 8. Press the ENTER key on the keypad.
COnFG. (If a defective card is being used the Dis-
play will blink the message “bAd CArd”. Turn start- 9. When the software loading has successfully com-
stop switch OFF and remove the card.) pleted, the Display will show the message “EEPrM
donE.” (If a problem occurs while loading the soft-
5. Press the UP or DOWN arrow key until display ware, the Display will blink the message “Pro FAIL”
reads, LOAd 54XX for Recip (even numbers) or “bad 12V.” Turn start-stop switch OFF and remove
the card.)
10.Turn unit OFF using start-stop switch (ST).
The Display will alternate to between PrESS EntR
and rEV XXXX 11. Remove the PCMIA card from the programming/
software port and return the unit to normal operation
6. Press the ENTER key on the keypad. by placing the start-stop switch in the ON position.
7. The Display will show the message “Pro SoFt.” This 12.Confirm correct model configuration using the key-
message will last for up to one minute. pad to choose code selcet 20 (CD20). The model
displayed should match the unit serial number plate.
6.20.4 Removing and Installing a Module
8. The Display module will go blank briefly, then read
“Pro donE” when the software loading has loaded. (If a. Removal:
a problem occurs while loading the software: the Dis- 1. Disconnect all front wire harness connectors and
play will blink the message “Pro FAIL” or “bad 12V”. move wiring out of way.
Turn start-stop switch OFF and remove the card.)
2. The lower controller mounting is slotted, loosen the
9. Turn unit OFF, via start-stop switch (ST). top mounting screw (see Figure 6-20) and lift up and
10.Remove the PCMIA card from the programming/ out.
software port and return the unit to normal operation 3. Disconnect the back connectors and remove mod-
by placing the start-stop switch in the ON position. ule.
11. Turn power on, and wait 15 seconds -- The status 4. When removing the replacement module from its
LED will flash quickly, and there will be no display. packaging , note how it is packaged. When returning
The controller is loading the new software into the old module for service, place it in the packaging
memory. This takes about 15 seconds. in the same manner as the replacement. The pack-
T-320 6-20
aging has been designed to protect the module from d. Refer to paragraph 6.20 and remove controller to gain
both physical and electrostatic discharge damage access to the sensor plugs.
during storage and transit.
Table 6-2 Sensor Temperature/Resistance Chart
b.Installation: (+/--.002%)
Install the module by reversing the removal steps. Temperature Resistance
Torque values for mounting screws (item 2, see _C _F (Ohms)
Figure 6-20) are 0.23 mkg (20 inch-pounds). Torque AMBS, CPSS, CPDS
value for the connectors is 0.12 mkg (10 inch-pounds). DTS, RTS, RRS,
STS, SRS
6.21 VENT POSITION SENSOR SERVICE --30 --22 177,000 1,770,000
The fresh air vent position sensor alarm (AL50) will --25 --13 130,400 1,340,000
occur if the sensor reading is not stable for 4 minutes or if --20 --4 97,070 970,700
the sensor is outside of its valid range (shorted or open).
This can occur if the vent is loose or the panel is --15 5 72,900 729,000
defective. To confirm a defective panel, assure that the --10 14 55,330 553,000
wing nut is secure and then power cycle the unit. If the
alarm immediately reappears as active, the panel --5 23 43,200 423,300
should be replaced. 0 32 32,650 326,500
The alarm should immediately go inactive, check the 5 41 25,390 253,900
4--minute stability requirement. If the alarm reoccurs 10 50 19,900 199,000
after the four minutes and the panel was known to have
been stable, then the sensor should be replaced. 15 59 15,700 157,100
20 68 12,490 124,900
In order to replace the VPS, the panel must be removed
and replaced with another upper fresh air panel 25 77 10,000 100,000
equipped with VPS. 30 86 8,060 80,600
Upon installation, a new vent position sensor assembly 35 95 6,530 65,300
requires calibration as follows: 40 104 5,330 53,300
1. Rotate the vent to the 0 CMH/ CFM position. 45 113 4,370 43,700
2. Code select 45 will automatically display. Press the 50 122 3,600 36,000
Enter key and hold for 5 seconds. 55 131 2,900 29,000
3. After the enter key has been pressed the display will 60 140 2,490 24,900
read CAL (for calibration). 65 149 2,080 20,800
4. Press the ALT MODE key and hold for five seconds. 65 158 1,750 17,500
5. After the calibration has been completed, Code 45 e. Using the plug connector marked “EC”, that is con-
will display 0 CMH / CFM. nected to the back of the controller, locate the sensor
wires (RRS, RTS, SRS, STS, AMBS, DTS, CPDS
6.22 TEMPERATURE SENSOR SERVICE OR CPSS as required). Follow those wires to the con-
nector and using the pins of the plug, measure the
Procedures for service of the Return Recorder, Return resistance. Values are provided in Table 6-2.
Temperature, Supply Recorder, Supply Temperature,
Ambient, Defrost Temperature, Compressor Discharge Due to the variations and inaccuracies in ohmmeters,
and Compressor Suction temperature sensors are thermometers or other test equipment, a reading
provided in the following sub paragraphs. within 2% of the chart value would indicate a good
sensor. If a sensor is defective, the resistance read-
6.22.1 Sensor Checkout Procedure ing will usually be much higher or lower than the resis-
tance values given.
To check a sensor reading, do the following:
6.22.2 Sensor Replacement
a. Remove the sensor and place in a 0_C (32_F) ice-wa-
ter bath. The ice-water bath is prepared by filling an a. Turn unit power OFF and disconnect power supply.
insulated container (of sufficient size to completely b. Cut cable 5 cm (2 inches) from shoulder of defective
immerse bulb) with ice cubes or chipped ice, then fill- sensor and discard the defective probe only. Slide the
ing voids between ice with water and agitating until cap and grommet off a bulb type sensor and save for
mixture reaches 0_C (32_F) measured on a labora- reuse. Do not cut the grommet.
tory thermometer.
c. Cut one wire of existing cable 40 mm (1-1/2 inch)
b. Start unit and check sensor reading on the control shorter than the other wire.
panel. The reading should be 0_C (32_F). If the read-
ing is correct, reinstall sensor; if it is not, continue with d. Cut one replacement sensor wire (opposite color)
the following. back 40 mm (1-1/2 inch). (See Figure 6-21.)
c. Turn unit OFF and disconnect power supply. e. Strip back insulation on all wiring 6.3 mm (1/4 inch).
6-21 T-320
Sensor NOTE
40 mm (1 1/2 inch) The P5 Pre-Trip test must be run to inactivate
probe alarms (refer to paragraph 4.8).
6.22.3 Sensor Re--Installation
a. Sensors STS and SRS
6.3 mm (1/4 inch) To properly position a supply sensor, the sensor must be
Mounting Stud Type fully inserted into the probe holder. This positioning will
give the sensor the optimum amount of exposure to the
supply air stream, and will allow the Controller to
Sensor 40 mm (1-1/2 inches) operate correctly. Insufficient probe insertion into the
probe holder will result in poor temperature control due
to the lack of air flow over the sensor.
It is also necessary to ensure that the probe tip does not
6.3 mm (1/4 inch) contact the evaporator back panel. The design
minimum clearance of 6 mm (1/4 inch) should be
Bulb Type maintained (see Figure 6-23).
Figure 6-21 Sensor Types
f. Slide a large piece of heat shrink tubing over the Sensor
cable, and place the two small pieces of heat shrink Wires Cap and Grommet
tubing, one over each wire, before adding crimp fit- Assembly
tings as shown in Figure 6-22.
Evaporator
Sensor (Typical) Back Panel
Probe
Holder
Supply
Air
Stream
Cable
Large Heat Shrink Heat Shrink
Tubing (1) Tubing (2)
Figure 6-22 Sensor and Cable Splice

g. If required, slide the cap and grommet assembly onto Supply Sensor
the replacement sensor. 6 mm
(1/4 inch)
h. Slip crimp fittings over dressed wires (keeping wire
colors together). Make sure wires are pushed into
crimp fittings as far as possible and crimp with crimp- Figure 6-23 Supply Sensor Positioning
ing tool. b. Sensors RRS and RTS
i. Solder spliced wires with a 60% tin and 40% lead Reinstall the return sensor as shown in Figure 6-24. For
Rosincore solder. proper placement of the return sensor, be sure to
position the enlarged positioning section of the sensor
j. Slide heat shrink tubing over splice so that ends of against the the side of the mounting clamp.
tubing cover both ends of crimp as shown in
Figure 6-22.
Evaporator Grille
k. Heat tubing to shrink over splice. Make sure all seams
are sealed tightly against the wiring to prevent mois- Return Sensor
ture seepage.
l. Slide large heat shrink tubing over both splices and
shrink.
CAUTION
Mounting
Enlarged Positioning Clamp
Do not allow moisture to enter wire splice (Plastic) Section
area as this may affect the sensor resis-
tance. Figure 6-24 Return Sensor Positioning
c. Sensor DTS
m. Position sensor in unit as shown in Figure 6-23 and
re--check sensor resistance. The DTS sensor must have insulating material placed
completely over the sensor to insure the coil metal
n. Reinstall sensor, refer to paragraph 6.22.3. temperature is sensed.
T-320 6-22
6.23 ELECTRONIC PARTLOW TEMPERATURE a. Lift the stylus (item 5, Figure 6-25) by grasping the
RECORDER arm near the base, and pull the arm away from the
chart until it snaps into its retracted position.
The microprocessor based temperature recorder is
designed to interface with the DataCORDER to log b. Remove the chart retaining nut (item 10), remove
temperature with time. The electronic recorder will the used chart, and record today’s date on the old
automatically record the return air, supply air, or both, chart.
based on the setting of temperature controller c. Press the “Change Chart” button (item 2).
configuration code CnF37, refer to Table 3-4. The
recorder reads and records data from the Controller in NOTE
present time, under normal operating conditions. Failure to press the change chart button, when
changing a chart with the power OFF, may
If the power has been OFF for more than thirty days, the
result in the chart advancing when power is
recorder will NOT re--synchronize (the chart will not
applied.
advance to present time), the pen tip will move to the
currently recorded temperature, and the recorder will d. Install a new chart, make sure the chart center hole
resume normal temperature recording. is placed over the center hub, and the chart edges
are behind the four hold down tabs (item 9).
If using the Electronic Partlow Recorder CTD P/N
12-00464-xx e. Mark today’s date, container number, and other
Where xx= an even number (example: 12--00464--08) required information on the new chart and install
The recorder will STOP when the power is OFF, and the under hold down tabs.
pen tip will remain at the last recorded temperature on f. Replace the chart nut loosely, rotate the chart until
the chart. When power is applied, and the power off the correct day is aligned with the “start arrow,” and
period is less than thirty days; the recorder will retrieve hand tighten the chart nut.
the logged data from the DataCORDER for the power
g. Gently lower the stylus arm until the pen tip (item 4)
off period and record it onto the chart, thereafter, the
comes in contact with the chart.
recorder will resume normal temperature recording.
If the optional DataCORDER battery pack is being used,
and the charge is too low to enable recording during the CAUTION
power off period of less than thirty days, the pen tip will
move to below the inner chart ring for the period when Do not allow the recorder stylus to snap
NO data was recorded by the DataCORDER. back down. The stylus arm base is spring
loaded, and damage may occur to the chart,
If the power has been OFF for more than thirty days, the or the stylus force may be altered.
recorder will NOT re--synchronize (the chart will not
advance to present time), the pen tip will move to the DO NOT move the stylus arm up and down
currently recorded temperature, and the recorder will on the chart face. This will result in damage
resume normal temperature recording. to the stylus motor gear.
6.23.3Adjusting the Recorder Stylus
6.23.1Replacing the Recorder
Proper stylus force upon the chart paper is important.
a. Turn power to the unit OFF. Factory adjustment is 113 to 127 grams (4 to 4.5
b. Open the recorder door (item 1, see Figure 6-25). ounces). To measure the force, use a spring type gage,
and attach it under the stylus as close as possible to the
c. Locate the connector below the recorder, and pen tip (item 4). Exert pull on the gage perpendicular to
squeeze the ears together to disconnect the plug, the chart surface. The measured force should be noted
(item 6). just as the pen tip leaves the surface.
d. Remove the four mounting screws (item 8), and NOTE
remove the recorder. The two coil springs near the base of the stylus
are NOT involved in establishing chart contact
e. Install the new recorder by reversing the above
force. They serve only to hold the stylus in its
steps.
retracted position.
6.23.2Changing the Chart Correct adjustment is made by carefully bending the
portion of the stylus arm between the bend near the pen
NOTE tip, and the first bend towards the stylus arm base. If the
To prevent recorder corrosion, it is important to force is too low, the stylus trace will be light and difficult
assure the door is securely closed at all times to read. If the force is too great, wrinkling, or tearing of
after completing the chart change. the paper chart may occur.
6-23 T-320
1 3
2
1. Recorder Door
2. Change Chart
Button
4 3. Recorder Box
4. Pen Tip
10 5 5. Stylus Arm
6. Connector
7. Calibration Button
9 (Located underneath)
8. Mounting Screws,
8 #10-24 x 7/16 inches long
9. Hold Down Tab
10. Chart Retaining Nut
7
6
Figure 6-25. Electronic Partlow Temperature Recorder

6.23.4Rezeroing the Recording Thermometer b. If the tip of the pen (item 4) is on the 0°C (32°F) chart
ring the recorder is in calibration, proceed to step c.
For Electronic Partlow Recorder CTD P/N If the tip of the pen is NOT on the 0°C (32°F) chart
12-00464-xx
Where xx= an odd number (example: 12--00464--03 ) ring, the operator must loosen the two screws on the
bottom of the stylus arm to adjust the pen tip
NOTE manually to the 0°C (32°F) chart ring. Tighten the
Use chart CTD P/N 09-00128-00 (°F) screws when adjustment is complete.
P/N 09-00128-01 (°C). c. Press the calibration button and the pen will position
itself to the correct temperature reading.
a. Press the “Calibration” button (item 7, Figure 6-25)
on the bottom of the recorder. The pen tip will drive 6.24 MAINTENANCE OF PAINTED SURFACES
fully down scale, then move upscale to the chart ring The refrigeration unit is protected by a special paint
at --29°C (--20°F), and stop. system against the corrosive atmosphere in which it
normally operates. However, should the paint system
b. If the tip of the pen (item 4) is on the --29°C (--20°F) be damaged, the base metal can corrode. In order to
protect the refrigeration unit from the highly corrosive
chart ring the recorder is in calibration, proceed to sea atmosphere, or if the protective paint system is
step c. If the tip of the pen is NOT on the --29°C scratched or damaged, clean area to bare metal using a
(--20°F) chart ring, the operator must loosen the two wire brush, emery paper or equivalent cleaning method.
screws on the bottom of the stylus arm to adjust the Immediately following cleaning, apply 2--part epoxy
pen tip manually to the --29°C (--20°F) chart ring. paint to the area. and allow to dry. After the first coat
dries, apply a second coat.
Tighten the screws when adjustment is complete.
6.25 COMPOSITE CONTROL BOX REPAIRS
c. Press the calibration button and the pen will position
6.25.1 Introduction
itself to the correct temperature reading.
This procedure provides instructions for repair of the
For Electronic Partlow Recorder CTD P/N Carrier Transicold composite control box. Damage to
12-00464-xx the control box may be in the form of a chip or hole, a
Where xx= an even number (example: 12--00464--08) crack, a damaged thread insert or damage to the door
hinge inserts. Generally, the object of the repair must be
NOTE to ensure sufficient strength is restored to the damaged
area and the repair must keep the box water tight.
Use chart CTD P/N 09-00128-00 (°F) Information on repair kits and repair procedures for each
P/N 09-00128-01 (°C). type of damage is provided in the following paragraphs.
Ambient temperature must be above 7°C (45°F) for
a. Press the “Calibration” button (item 7, Figure 6-25) proper curing of epoxy repairs.
on the bottom of the recorder. The pen tip will drive 6.25.2 Cracks
fully down scale, then move upscale to the chart ring Cracks in the control box are repaired using a fiberglass
at 0°C (32°F), and stop. patch over the damaged area. Materials required are
T-320 6-24
included in the Fiberglass Patch Kit supplied with Crack The damaged insert must be removed from the control
Repair Kit, Carrier Transicold part number box. Table 6-5 identifies the drill size and drill depth to be
76-00724-00SV (see Table 6-3). used for each insert. A stop ring should be used on the
drill bit to limit the depth.
a. The surface must be clean and dry. Roughen the sur-
face with sandpaper to ensure a good bond. a. Center the drill bit on the insert and drill to the pre-
scribed depth.
b. Cut the fiberglass cloth to allow a 25mm (1--inch)
overlap around the area to be repaired. b. Remove the chips from the drilled hole.
c. Stretch and position the cloth over the area to be re- c. Mix the two component epoxy and fill the hole 1/2 way
paired and secure it with masking tape. to the top with epoxy.
d. Make up sufficient epoxy glue to cover the cloth by d. Press the insert in until it is flush with the surface.
mixing equal parts of resin and hardener. Saturate the e. Wipe away any excess epoxy. The part is ready for
cloth with the epoxy glue, spreading evenly. service after the bond material has hardened and is
e. Remove the tape and overlap the edge of the cloth tack free (approximately 20 minutes)
approximately 6 to 12 mm (1/4” to 1/2”) with glue. 6.25.5 Door Hinge Inserts
f. Epoxy will dry in 45--60 minutes. When completely If the door hinges have been pulled from the control box
cured (12 hours), use sandpaper to smooth edges of drill and reinstall the hinge as shown in Figure 6-26 and
the patch. described in the following steps.
6.25.3 Chips And Holes
Chips and holes in the control box are repaired using a
piece of aluminum or stainless steel to cover the
damaged area. The material can be cut to suit and
riveted in place. An adhesive sealant must be used to
make the repair watertight. The adhesive sealant
(Sikaflex 221) is included in Crack Repair Kit Carrier
Transicold part number 76-00724-00SV (see
Table 6-3). Do not use an acetone based silicone
sealant (Which can be identified by a vinegar--like
odor).
a. To make up the patch, cut a piece of aluminum or
stainless steel so that it will overlap the damaged area
by at least 40 mm (1 1/2”) on all sides.
b. Choose rivet locations and drill the rivet holes in the
corresponding locations on the control box and patch
piece.
c. Apply the adhesive sealant around the damaged area
to form a seal between the control box and the patch
piece.
Figure 6-26 Door Hinge Repair
d. Rivet the patch piece in place.
Materials needed:
e. File smooth any rough edges (including rivets) that
may come into contact with wires. 1. Cut two square pieces of 3 mm thick (1/8 inch)
aluminum or stainless steel approximately 40
6.25.4 Inserts mm (1 5/8”) square. These squares will serve as
The threaded brass inserts that are molded into the backing plates.
control box will need to be replaced if the threads 2. Two nuts, bolts (10 -- 24 x 1”) and washers for
become stripped, or if the insert becomes loose. The each insert that needs repair.
inserts and epoxy are contained in repair kit, Carrier
Transicold part number 76-50084-00 (see Table 6-4). a. Drill a 1/4” hole in the center of each square backing
There are 6 different inserts used in the control box. plate.
Refer to Figure 6-27 for the locations of the various b. Pass the bolts through the bolts holes in the door
inserts. hinge, then through the control box at the location
where the hinge insert pulled out.
NOTE c. From inside the control box, slide the backing plates
An epoxy application gun is also needed, Carri- over the bolts and secure in place with the washers
er Transicold part number 07 -- 00391 -- 00. and nuts.
6-25 T-320
Table 6-3 Crack, Chip & Hole Repair Kit
ITEM DESCRIPTION PART NUMBER Qty
1 Crack Repair Kit -- Includes 76--00724--00SV 1
2 . . . Fiberglass Patch Kit (Loctite FK--98 or 80265) 76--00724--00Z 10
3 . . . Sikaflex 221 Adhesive Sealant (Sikaflex 232--361) 02--00067--02Z 10
4 . . . Instruction Sheet 98--02339--00 10
Table 6-4 Insert Repair Kit

ITEM DESCRIPTION PART NUMBER Qty
1 Insert Repair Kit -- Includes 76--50084--00 1
2 . . . Insert - 17.53 x 9.91 mm (.690 x .390 in) 1/4--20 Threads 34--06231--01 10
3 . . . Insert - 15.88 x 6.35 mm (.625 x .250 in) 10-24 Threads 34--06231--03 10
6 . . . Insert - 12.7 x 9.91 mm (.5 x .390 in) 1/4--20 Threads 34--06231--06 10
8 . . . Durabond Epoxy E20--HP (Loctite 29314) 02--0082--00 1
9 . . . Static Mixing Tube (Loctite 983440) 07--00390--00 1
10 . . . Instruction Sheet 98--02338--00 1
Note: Insert repair procedures require use of an Application Gun, Carrier part number 07--00391--00 (Loctite 983435)
Table 6-5 Drill Information
Item Insert part number Drill size and depth
1 34- 06231- 01 10.3 mm x 17.8 mm deep (.404 in. x .700 in. deep)
2 34- 06231- 03 6.8 mm x 16.3 mm deep (.266 in. x .640 in. deep)
3 34- 06231- 04 7.9 mm x 25.4 mm deep (.3125 in. x 1.0 in. deep)
4 34- 06231- 05 6.9 mm (.270 in.) Drill completely through.
T-320 6-26
01
06
07
04 04
03
05
03
03
6-27
03
Figure 6-27. Insert Location

07
03
05
INSERT PART NUMBERS 34--06231--## WHERE THE ## IS AS INDICATED
T-320
6.26 COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE MODULE c. Remove the circuit breaker panel, with circuit
INSTALLATION breaker, from the control box.
d. Locate, wires CB21/CIA3, CB22/CIA5 and
CB23/CIA7 that have been tied back in the wire
harness. Remove the protective heat shrink from
the ends of the wires.
e. Attach the three wires as addressed to the LOAD
side of the circuit breaker.
f. Refit the circuit breaker panel.
g. Fit the new RMU into the unit.
h. Remove plugs CIA, CIB and CID from the wiring
harness and attach to the module.
Communications i. Replace the low voltage shield.
CB1
interface Module
Table 6-6 Recommended Bolt Torque Values
Figure 6-28. Communications Interface

Installation BOLT DIA. THREADS TORQUE Nm
FREE SPINNING
Units with communication interface module provision
have the required wiring installed. The provision wiring #4 40 5.2 in-lbs 0.6
#6 32 9.6 in-lbs 1.1
kit (part number 76--00685--00), includes three #8 32 20 in-lbs 2.0
pre--addressed wires installed between the circuit #10 24 23 in-lbs 2.5
breaker and communication interface module locations. 1/4 20 75 in-lbs 8.4
These wires are to be connected to the module and 5/16 18 11 ft-lbs 15
circuit breaker to allow the module to communicate over 3/8 16 20 ft-lbs 28
7/16 14 31 ft-lbs 42
the power system. To install the module, do the 1/2 13 43 ft-lbs 59
following: 9/16 12 57 ft-lbs 78
5/8 11 92 ft-lbs 127
3/4 10 124 ft-lbs 171
WARNING
NONFREE SPINNING (LOCKNUTS ETC.)
The Unit Power Plug Must Be Disconnected
1/4 20 82.5 in-lbs 9.3
To Remove Power From Circuit Breaker Cb1 5/16 18 145.2 in-lbs 16.4
3/8 16 22.0 ft-lbs 23
a. CB1 is connected to the power system, see wiring 7/16 14 34.1 ft-lbs 47
schematic. Ensure that the unit power is off AND 1/2 13 47.3 ft-lbs 65
that the unit power plug is disconnected. 9/16 12 62.7 ft-lbs 86
5/8 11 101.2 ft-lbs 139
b. Open control box, see Figure 6-28 and remove low 3/4 10 136.4 ft-lbs 188
voltage shield. Open high voltage shield.
T-320 6-28
Table 6-7 R-134a Temperature - Pressure Chart
Temperature Vacuum Temperature Pressure
_F _C “/hg cm/hg kg/cm@@ bar _F _C psig kPa kg/cm@@ bar
--40 --40 14.6 49.4 37.08 0.49 28 --2 24.5 168.9 1.72 1.69
.35 .37 12.3 41.6 31.25 0.42 30 --1 26.1 180.0 1.84 1.80
--30 --34 9.7 32.8 24.64 0.33 32 0 27.8 191.7 1.95 1.92
--25 --32 6.7 22.7 17.00 0.23 34 1 29.6 204.1 2.08 2.04
--20 --29 3.5 11.9 8.89 0.12 36 2 31.3 215.8 2.20 2.16
--18 --28 2.1 7.1 5.33 0.07 38 3 33.2 228.9 2.33 2.29
40 4 35.1 242.0 2.47 2.42
--16 --27 0.6 2.0 1.52 0.02
45 7 40.1 276.5 2.82 2.76
Temperature Pressure
50 10 45.5 313.7 3.20 3.14
_F _C psig kPa kg/cm@@ bar
55 13 51.2 353.0 3.60 3.53
--14 --26 0.4 1.1 0.03 0.03
60 16 57.4 395.8 4.04 3.96
--12 --24 1.2 8.3 0.08 0.08
65 18 64.1 441.0 4.51 4.42
--10 --23 2.0 13.8 0.14 0.14
70 21 71.1 490.2 5.00 4.90
--8 --22 2.9 20.0 0.20 0.20
75 24 78.7 542.6 5.53 5.43
--6 --21 3.7 25.5 0.26 0.26
80 27 86.7 597.8 6.10 5.98
--4 --20 4.6 31.7 0.32 0.32
85 29 95.3 657.1 6.70 6.57
--2 --19 5.6 36.6 0.39 0.39
90 32 104.3 719.1 7.33 7.19
0 --18 6.5 44.8 0.46 0.45
95 35 114.0 786.0 8.01 7.86
2 --17 7.6 52.4 0.53 0.52
100 38 124.2 856.4 8.73 8.56
4 --16 8.6 59.3 0.60 0.59
105 41 135.0 930.8 9.49 9.31
6 --14 9.7 66.9 0.68 0.67
110 43 146.4 1009 10.29 10.09
8 --13 10.8 74.5 0.76 0.74
115 46 158.4 1092 11.14 10.92
10 --12 12.0 82.7 0.84 0.83
120 49 171.2 1180 12.04 11.80
12 --11 13.2 91.0 0.93 0.91
125 52 184.6 1273 12.98 12.73
14 --10 14.5 100.0 1.02 1.00
130 54 198.7 1370 13.97 13.70
16 --9 15.8 108.9 1.11 1.09
135 57 213.6 1473 15.02 14.73
18 --8 17.1 117.9 1.20 1.18
140 60 229.2 1580 16.11 15.80
20 --7 18.5 127.6 1.30 1.28
145 63 245.6 1693 17.27 16.93
22 --6 19.9 137.2 1.40 1.37
150 66 262.9 1813 18.48 18.13
24 --4 21.4 147.6 1.50 1.48
155 68 281.1 1938 19.76 19.37
26 --3 22.9 157.9 1.61 1.58
6-29 T-320
SECTION 7
ELECTRICAL WIRING SCHEMATICS
7.1 INTRODUCTION
This section contains the Electrical Schematics and Wiring Diagrams. The diagrams are presented as follows:
Figure 7-1 Provides the legend for use with all figures.
Figure 7-2 Provides the basic schematic diagram.
Figure 7-3 Supplements the basic schematic diagram and provides schematics for TransFRESH ,and Emergency
Bypass.
Figure 7-5 Provides the wiring diagram .
Figure 7-4 Provides the schematic and wiring diagrams for the Electronic Partlow Recorder
Sequence of operation descriptions for the various modes of operation are provided in paragraph 4.10
LEGEND
SYMBOL DESCRIPTION (Schematic Location) SYMBOL DESCRIPTION (Schematic Location)
AMBS AMBIENT SENSOR (C--21) ORV OIL RETURN SOLENOID VALVE (N--24)
BM BYPASS MODULE (E--8) PA COMPRESSOR PHASE CONTACTOR (L--11,M--10,P1
CB1 CIRCUIT BREAKER -- 460 VOLT (J--1) PB COMPRESSOR PHASE CONTACTOR (L--10,M--11,P2)
CB2 CIRCUIT BREAKER -- AUTOTRANSFORMER (C--1) PR PROBE RECEPTACLE [USDA]
D--21.L--22,M--22,N--22)
CF CONDENSER FAN CONTACTOR (M--12, N--5)
RM REMOTE MONITORING RECEPTACLE
CFS CONDENSER FAN SWITCH (L--12) (J--7,J--8,J--9,K--8)
CI COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE MODULE (A--3) RRS RETURN RECORDER SENSOR (K--21)
CL COOL LIGHT (J--8) RTS RETURN TEMPERATURE SENSOR (B--21)
CM CONDENSER FAN MOTOR (H--12,) SMV SUCTION MODULATING VALVE (K--24)
CP COMPRESSOR MOTOR (T--1) SPT SUCTION PRESSURE TRANSDUCER (M--21)
CPDS COMPRESSOR DISCHARGE SENSOR (A--21) SRS SUPPLY RECORDER SENSOR (K--22)
CPSS COMPRESSOR SUCTION SENSOR (C--21) ST START -- STOP SWITCH (K--4)
CR CHART RECORDER [TEMPERATURE RECORDER] STS SUPPLY TEMPERATURE SENSOR (A--21)
CS CURRENT SENSOR (M--1) TBU TRANSFORMER BRIDGING UNIT
DHBL DEFROST HEATER -- BOTTOM LEFT (T--4) TCC TransFRESH COMMUNICATIONS
DHBR DEFROST HEATER -- BOTTOM RIGHT (R--4) CONNECTOR (D--5)
DHTL DEFROST HEATER -- TOP LEFT (T--4) TE CONTROLLER RELAY -- HIGH
SPEED EVAPORATOR FANS
DHTR DEFROST HEATER -- TOP RIGHT (R--4) (K--13)
DL DEFROST LIGHT (J--7)
TFC TransFRESH CONTROLLER (G--5)
DPH DRAIN PAN HEATER (P--4)
TH CONTROLLER RELAY -- HEATING (K--15)
DPT DISCHARGE PRESSURE TRANSDUCER (L--21) TN CONTROLLER RELAY -- CONDENSER FAN (K--12)
DTS DEFROST TEMPERATURE SENSOR (B--21) TP TEST POINT (D--20,G--12,G--17,H--11,H--16,J--12,
DVM DUAL VOLTAGE MODULE (D--1) J--13,J--15,M--18)
DVR DUAL VOLTAGE RECEPTACLE (E--1) TR TRANSFORMER (M--2)
EF EVAPORATOR FAN CONTACTOR [HIGH] TRANS AUTO TRANSFORMER 230/460 (D--1)
(L--13,L--14,P--7,P--10) TRC TransFRESH REAR CONNECTOR (E--5)
EM EVAPORATOR FAN MOTOR (E--13,G--13,T--8,T--11) TS CONTROLLER RELAY -- ECONOMIZER SOLENOID
ES EVAPORATOR FAN CONTACTOR [LOW] VALVE (E--17)
(M--14,P--7,P--10)
TT CONTROLLER RELAY -- OIL RETURN VALVE (C--11)
ESV ECONOMIZER SOLENOID VALVE (J--17)
TU CONTROLLER RELAY -- UNLOADER SOLENOID
F FUSE (C--5,D--20,E--20,H--5) VALVE (E--16)
FT FUSE -- TransFRESH (H--5) TV CONTROLLER RELAY -- LOW SPEED EVAPORATOR
HPS HIGH PRESSURE SWITCH (G--11) FANS (K--14)
HR HEATER CONTACTOR (M--15, N--3) TL CONTROLLER RELAY -- RM COOL (G--8)
HS HUMIDITY SENSOR (F--21) TF CONTROLLER RELAY -- RM DEFROST (G--7)
HTT HEAT TERMINATION THERMOSTAT (G--15) TI CONTROLLER RELAY -- RM INRANGE (G--9)
IC INTERROGATOR CONNECTOR [FRONT/REAR] TCP CONTROLLER RELAY -- COMPRESSOR PHASE
(P--22,P--21)
IP INTERNAL PROTECTOR (E--13,G--13,H--12) SEQUENCING (K--10,K--11)
IRL IN RANGE LIGHT (J9) USV UNLOADER SOLENOID VALVE (K--18)
MDS MANUAL DEFROST SWITCH (E--18) VPS VENT POSITION SENSOR (G--22)
WP WATER PRESSURE SWITCH (E--12)
Figure 7-1 LEGEND
7-1 T-320
Figure 7-2 SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM
T-320 7-2
ST TR
SEE FIGURE SEE FIGURE
7--2 7--2
TO KB7
TransFRESH CONTROLLER
To QC1
To F3A
To F3B
To F3B
CONTROLLER
Emergency Bypass
Figure 7-3 SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM -- TransFRESH and Emergency Bypass
7-3 T-320
KE2 [BM1A]
KE3 [BM1B]
KE4 [BM2A]
KE5 [BM2B]
[BMT2]
[BMT3]
[BMT1]
RMA
[BMA2]
NOTE: WHEN CFS OR BM ARE INSTALLED, WIRE DESTINATIONS CHANGE . ADDRESSES FOR THE CHANGED DESTINATIONS ARE SHOWN IN BRACKETS “[XXX]”.
Figure 7-4 WIRING DIAGRAM (Sheet 1 of 2)
T-320 7-4
CFS
KA6
SMVD CFA1
[BM2B]
SMVC
[BM1B]
SMVB
[BM2A]
SMVA
[BM1A]
NOTE: WHEN CFS IS INSTALLED, WIRE DESTINATIONS CHANGE FROM THE STANDARD.
ADDRESSES FOR THE CHANGED DESTINATIONS ARE SHOWN IN BRACKETS “[XXX]”.
Figure 7-4 WIRING DIAGRAM (Sheet 2 of 2)
7-5 T-320
NOTE: STANDARD CONTROLLER JUMPERS: MA3 TO MA7 AND MA9 TO MA11
(SEE Figure 7-2 ) ARE REMOVED IN THIS APPLICATION
CR5
CR4
CR3
CR6
CR8
CR2
NOTE: STANDARD CONTROLLER JUMPERS: MA3 TO MA7 AND MA9 TO MA11

(SEE Figure 7-2) ARE REMOVED IN THIS APPLICATION
Figure 7-5 SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM, WIRING DIAGRAM-- Electronic Partlow Recorder
T-320 7-6
INDEX
A F
Air Cooled Condenser Section, 2-4 Failure Action, 3-4
Alarm, 3-6, 3-10, 3-11, 3-17, 3-26 Filter--Drier, 6-12
Arctic Mode, 3-4 Fresh Air Makeup, 2-1, 4-1
Autotransformer, 6-18 Frozen Mode, 4-7
Frozen Mode -- Conventional, 3-6
B Frozen Mode -- Economy, 3-6

Function Code, 3-13, 3-14, 3-24
Bulb Mode, 3-5
C G
General Description, 2-1
Capacitors, 6-16
Generator Protection, 3-4
Checking Superheat, 6-13
Communications Interface Module, 3-10, 6-28
Composite Control Box, 6-25 H
Compressor, 6-5 Heat Lockout, 3-4
Compressor Section, 2-3 Heater, 6-14
Condenser Coil, 6-10 Heating Mode, 4-7
Condenser Pressure Control, 3-4 High Pressure Switch, 6-10
Configuration Software, 3-3, 3-8
Configuration Variables, 3-12
Controller, 3-3, 6-18 I
Controller Software, 3-3 Inspection, 4-1, 4-3
Crankcase Heater, 4-4 Introduction, 1-1
D K
DataCORDER, 3-7, 3-10, 4-3 Key Pad, 3-2
DataCORDER Software, 3-7
DataReader, 3-10
Defrost Interval, 3-4
L
Defrost Mode, 4-7 Leak Checking, 6-3
Display Module, 3-2 Logging Interval, 3-8
Lower Air, 1-2
E
Evacuation, 6-3
M
Evaporator, 6-14 Manifold Gauge Set, 6-1
Evaporator Fan, 1-2, 3-4, 6-15 Microporcessor System, 3-1
Evaporator Section, 2-2 Modes Of Operation, 3-4
Expansion Valve, 6-12 Motor Current, 6-32
Index-1 T-320
O S
Safety and Protective Devices, 2-9
Oil Level , 6-9 Sampling Type, 3-10
Operational Software, 3-3, 3-7 Sensor Configuration, 3-8
Sequence Of operation, 4-6
Service Valves, 6-1
Starting, 4-3
P Stopping, 4-3
Suction Modulating Valve, 6-16
Painted Surfaces, 6-25
Perishable Mode, 4-6 T

Perishable Mode -- Conventional, 3-4 Temperature Control, 3-4, 3-6
Temperature Recorder, 4-3, 6-23
Perishable Mode -- Dehumidification, 3-5
Temperature Sensor, 6-20
Perishable Mode -- Economy, 3-5 Thermistor Format, 3-8
Torque Values, 6-28, 6-30
Power, 4-1
Pre--Trip, 3-7, 3-10, 3-20, 3-25, 4-3

U
Probe Check, 4-5
Upper Air, 1-2
Pumping Down, 6-2 USDA, 3-11
V
R Vent Postion Sensor, 6-20
Refrigerant Charge, 6-4 W

Refrigeration Circuit, 2-10 Water Cooled Condenser, 6-10
Water--Cooled Condenser Section, 2-5
Refrigeration System Data, 2-7
Wear Limits, 6-29
Refrigeration Unit -- Front Section, 2-1 Wiring Schematic, 7-1
T-320
Index-2
Carrier Transicold Division,
Carrier Corporation
Container Products Group
P.O. Box 4805
Syracuse, N.Y. 13221 U.S A
www.carrier.transicold.com
A member of the United Technologies Corporation family. Stock symbol UTX

2004 Carrier Corporation D Printed in U. S. A. 12/04

69NT40-511-001 To 199

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

69NT40-511-001 To 199

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

69NT40-511-001 To 199

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Container Refrigeration

OPERATION AND SERVICE

T-- 320 Rev A

PARAGRAPH NUMBER Page

PARAGRAPH NUMBER Page

PARAGRAPH NUMBER Page

PARAGRAPH NUMBER Page

PARAGRAPH NUMBER Page

PARAGRAPH NUMBER Page

TABLE NUMBER Page

The scroll compressor achieves low suc-

1. Compressor Guard 14. Economizer Service Valve/Connection

1. Grille and Venturi Assembly 15. From Compressor Discharge

1. Economizer 13. Water Pressure Switch

1. Compressor Phase A Contactor 10. Interrogator Connector (Box Location)

UNSAFE CONDITION DEVICE DEVICE SETTING

Abnormal pressures/tempera- Fusible Plug -- Used on the Receiver 93 _C = (200 _F)

TXV BULB SMV

ORV SUCTION SERVICE

STANDARD OPERATION WITH WATER COOLED CONDENSER

TXV BULB SMV

DISCHARGE LIQUID SUCTION

Figure 2-7 Refrigeration Circuit Schematic -- Standard Operation

Figure 2-8 Refrigeration Circuit Schematic -- Economized Operation

TXV BULB SMV

SUCTION SERVICE VALVE

LIQUID ECONOMIZER SUCTION

Figure 2-9 Refrigeration Circuit Schematic -- Unloaded Operation

CONTROL MODULE DISPLAY MODULE

TEMPERATURE CONTROL SOFTWARE

CONFIGURATION OPERATIONAL ALARMS PRE--TRIP

Figure 3- 1 Temperature Control System

Enter Confirms a selection or saves a

1. Mounting Screw 5. Fuses

CONFIGURATION NO. TITLE DEFAULT OPTION

Controller Software: 5120

Figure 3- 5 Standard Configuration Download Report

CONFIGURATION TITLE DEFAULT OPTION

Code TITLE DESCRIPTION

Do not attempt to remove power plug(s) be- Figure 4-1 Autotransformer

40 The vent position will display for 30 seconds whenever

4.6 STARTING AND STOPPING INSTRUCTIONS

4.4 CONNECT WATER-COOLED CONDENSER

HEATING HEATING HEATING

NOTE: TEMPERATURES INDICATIONS ARE ABOVE OR BELOW SET POINT

Figure 4-3 Controller Operation -- Perishable Mode

NOTE: TEMPERATURES INDICATIONS ARE ABOVE OR BELOW SET POINT

Figure 4-4 Controller Operation -- Frozen Mode

Figure 4-5 Perishable Mode

In the Conventional Perishable Mode of opera- TS ESV

FOR FULL DIAGRAM AND

solenoid valve and condenser fan motors. The cool

e. When return air temperature is 10_C (18_F) or more

f. When the return air temperature increases to 0.2_C TS ESV

a. Attach manifold gauge set to the compressor suction

d. Test the evacuation setup for leaks by backseating 10 5

e. Midseat the refrigerant system service valves.

f. Open the vacuum pump and electronic vacuum 9 7 6

i. Repeat steps f.and g. one time. 6.3.5 Refrigerant Charge